JP7267950B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that executes a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group. For example, Patent Literature 1 discloses a gaming machine capable of executing a group effect in which images of a plurality of curactors and objects appear.

JP 2019-050851 A

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to make the game more interesting by executing the group effect, but there is still room for improvement regarding such group effect.

The present invention has been devised in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a group effect more favorably.

(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a performance execution means;
a plurality of lighting means,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a group effect displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group,
There are a first stage and a second stage with different production backgrounds,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the display of a new character until the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character ends,
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character ends without the character being newly displayed,
The production executing means is
When executing the group effect in the first stage, the group effect can be executed such that the group effect starts from a predetermined number of frames;
When executing the group effect in the second stage, the group effect can be executed such that the group effect starts from a specific number of frames different from the predetermined number of frames,
the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the group performance is performed in the first stage; the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the group performance is performed in the second stage; is different,
The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the group performance is performed in the first stage and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the group performance is performed in the second stage are It is higher than the expected degree of control to the advantageous state when the title in the specific effect informing whether or not to control to the advantageous state becomes the specific mode.
(Fig. 20, Fig. 36)

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating a frame lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating a special figure LED board and a 4th design unit. It is a figure looking into between the game board and the image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the various board|substrates etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating hit classification. It is a figure for demonstrating each random number. It is a figure for demonstrating a big-hit determination table and a big-hit kind determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a production|presentation control command. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a previous variation pattern on the main side; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side; It is a diagram for explaining a post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of losing. It is a diagram for explaining a post-variation pattern determination table at the time of the big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating a previous fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the sub side; It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table in each advance notice production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design variation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during jackpot opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit opening post-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a group announcement setting process; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of group announcement execution processing; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a group advance notice work process; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure which shows the whole picture of six-person group notice. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining auxiliary display used in the group announcement effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining motion blur processing used in the group announcement effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the state of contours when characters overlap in the group announcement effect; It is the figure which looked in between the game board and the image display device during execution of the group announcement effect. It is a figure which shows the whole image of an explosive chew group notice. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining changes in sound volume and a luminance data table in a group announcement effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of a 6-person group notice in stage A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the generation timing of an explosive chew group notice in stage B; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the group announcement luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group announcement luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the group advance notice luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the group notice luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a board left lamp in the group advance notice luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the group advance notice luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the group notice luminance data table; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in a reach line luminance data table. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the reach line luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the reach line luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the reach line luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a left-board lamp grandchild table in the reach line luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the reach line luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the reach line luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the background notice luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background notice luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the background notice luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the background notice luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for left lamps in the background notice luminance data table; FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the background notice luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the background notice luminance data table; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the luminance data table at the time of all lighting. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a PUSH effect luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a group announcement luminance data table according to a modification; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the group preliminary announcement luminance data table according to the modification; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode when a six-person group announcement is executed in stage A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode when a six-person group announcement is executed in stage A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode when a six-person group announcement is executed in stage A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode when a six-person group announcement is executed in stage A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode when a six-person group announcement is executed in stage A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode when a six-person group announcement is executed in stage A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode when a six-person group announcement is executed in stage A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a production mode of a comparative example when a 6-person group announcement is executed in stage A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a mode of effect when background notice is executed in stage A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode when a ramp notice is executed in stage A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage A; It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the SP ready-to-win first half. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the SP ready-to-win first half. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the SP ready-to-win first half. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the SP ready-to-win first half. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the SP ready-to-win first half. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the SP ready-to-win first half. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the SP ready-to-win first half. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the SP ready-to-win first half. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the SP ready-to-win first half. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in the final reach. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode in stage B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode when an explosive chew group notice is executed in stage B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode when an explosive chew group notice is executed in stage B; It is 3 for explaining the effect mode when the explosive chew group notice is executed in the stage B. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode when an explosive chew group notice is executed in stage B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode when an explosive chew group notice is executed in stage B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode when an explosive chew group notice is executed in stage B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode when an explosive chew group notice is executed in stage B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a mode of effect when Boingo group announcement is executed in stage A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a mode of effect when Boingo group announcement is executed in stage A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a mode of effect when Boingo group announcement is executed in stage A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a mode of effect when Boingo group announcement is executed in stage A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a mode of effect when Boingo group announcement is executed in stage A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a mode of effect when Boingo group announcement is executed in stage A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining details of Boingo group notice; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a production mode of a comparative example when Boingo group announcement is executed in stage A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a production mode of a comparative example when Boingo group announcement is executed in stage A; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when Boingo group announcement according to the modification is executed; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode when a dog pack advance notice is executed according to a modified example; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode when a dog pack advance notice is executed according to a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a comparison between a six-person group notice and a dog group notice; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a group announcement performance is executed during a reach line; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a group announcement performance is executed during a reach line;

[Pachinko machine configuration, etc.]
1 and 2 are front views of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 1 and 2 show the arrangement layout of the main members in a pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine. A pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. there is A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a game is played by variably displaying special symbols. "Variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

Incidentally, as the special symbols variably displayed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, two types of special symbols are provided. For example, one special symbol is also called "first special symbol" or "first special symbol", and the other special symbol is also called "second special symbol" or "second special symbol". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game".

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decoration symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolling display or updated display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character called Yume-chan, who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1, is drawn. Yume-chan is the main character who appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Also, on the game board 2 at the lower right of the image display device 5, a character called Jam-chan, who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1, is drawn. Jam-chan is a character that appears in content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Since Mumu-chan is the main character, she has the highest importance among all the characters, and appears more frequently (number of times) in the production than other characters including Jam-chan. In addition, Jam-chan has the highest degree of importance among characters other than Mumu-chan, who is the main character, and appears more frequently (number of times) in the production than other characters other than Mumu-chan. Characters with a higher priority than other characters, such as Mumu-chan and Jam-chan, are the characters that appear first in the character selection scene, the characters that are placed in the most conspicuous positions, or the characters that are selected. It may be the character positioned at the highest rank among them.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening (electric chew) that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 8). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, thereby opening the second starting prize opening. It will be in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening by tilting the movable wing when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second starting It is also said that the prize opening is open). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. note that,
The variable prize winning ball device 6B is not limited to one provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A includes a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 8). hereinafter referred to as a general prize winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A consists of a game board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 3) located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A large winning entrance door is provided in the space between them, and this large winning entrance door slides horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open and close the normal big winning mouth with game balls. open a path to Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in an off state, the large winning opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game balls enter the normal large winning opening. (Pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides toward the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the normal large winning opening. .

A game ball entering the normal big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through a region provided inside the normal big winning hole. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 8), game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When the game balls enter the normal big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example. Also, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round ends and the normal big winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 8). (referred to as a winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a large winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a. By horizontally sliding and opening the space between , the path for the game ball to the V big winning opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in an off state, the large winning opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. (Pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door is slid to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V large winning opening. .

A game ball that has entered the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 24 (see FIG. 8) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V winning area) provided inside the V big winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 24, the game state is controlled to a probability variable state. That is, in the present embodiment, V winning occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V big winning opening during the round of the jackpot game state, and the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. . In addition, the normal big prize mouth and the V big prize mouth are also collectively referred to as the big prize mouth. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

In the pachinko game machine 1, variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects are provided at left and right upper positions of the frame 3 for a game machine.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. The movable body 32 is configured such that the member labeled "POWERFUL" is located on the front side of the member labeled "2". Thus, the characters "POWERFUL2" are formed. "POWERFUL2" may be the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be a name representing content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the title of an animation, the name of a singer, etc.). In addition, the characters attached to the movable body 32 are the names of the main character who appears in the content used in the pachinko machine 1 or the character with the next highest priority to the main character (for example, the name of the main character, Yume Yume-chan, "Yume Yume"). dream”). In the present embodiment, the model name (powerful 2) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown on the movable body 32 .

In this embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 1 and a position covering the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. . Specifically, the movable body 32 includes only the members with the letters "POWERFUL" among the members with the letters "POWERFUL" attached and the members with the letters "2" attached. 2, it stops at a position covering the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. In addition, the movable body 32 is also called an accessory.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed (or depressed) by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 8).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 8).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special figure LED board 20 at the lower left of the game board 2.例文帳に追加The special figure LED board 20 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the number of first reserved memories, the number of second reserved memories, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing of the LED. In the special symbol LED board 20, the type of special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game are determined by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs. Represents the type of (second special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 5(a) to be described later, in the special figure LED board 20, a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 represents the type of the second special figure.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a fourth symbol unit 50 at the lower left of the image display device 5 . The fourth symbol unit 50 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the variation of the special symbol, the number of reserved memories, the right-handed display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. In the fourth symbol unit 50, depending on the combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs, the type of special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game Represents the type of (second special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 5(b) to be described later, in the fourth symbol unit 50, a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 53, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display unit 54 represents the type of the second special figure.

A pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps on a game board 2 and a game machine frame 3 . Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and a board top lamp 9B provided above the game board 2. A lamp 9C, an attacker lamp 9E provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B, a V attacker lamp 9F provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A, and a V big winning opening are opened to allow V winning. A V lamp 9G for notifying that a round of a possible jackpot game state or that a V prize has occurred, an electric lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, and a stick controller 31A are provided. a trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B; a frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the game machine frame 3; and a lamp 9R. The V lamp may notify that a big hit has occurred.

The role lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as role lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, the member with the character "POWERFUL" included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, the role lamp 9A1 is behind the parts "P" and "O", and the role lamp 9A2 is The character lamps 9A3 are arranged behind the "W" and "E" parts, the character lamps 9A3 are arranged behind the "R" and "F" parts, and the character lamp 9A4 are arranged behind the "U" and "L" parts. there is
As a result, the character lamps 9A1 to 9A4 are lit (lighted) on the back side of the member to which the character "POWERFUL" is attached, so that "POWERFUL" is lighted (lighted).

The board left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5. On the left side of the game board 2, a main character (for example, "Muyume" indicating the main character, Mumu) in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn, and the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 indicate the main character. are arranged on the back side of the portion of the game board 2 on which is drawn. As a result, the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (light up) behind the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn lights up (lights up). ing.

As shown in FIG. 2, the board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of board lamps 9C1 to 9C13. The upper side of the game board 2 is divided into three areas of left, middle, and right, and board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2, respectively. It is The part of the game board 2 where the board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, the board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and the board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are provided is formed of a transparent member capable of transmitting light, and thus the board lamps When 9C1 to 9C13 are lit (lighted) on the back side of the upper part of the game board 2, the upper part of the game board 2 is lit (lighted) in white, red, or the like.

The attacker lamp 9E is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, the attacker lamp 9E lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B lights up (lights up). Also, the V-attacker lamp 9F is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, the V-attacker lamp 9F lights (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, thereby lighting (lighting up) the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A.

The V lamp 9G is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 marked with "V". As a result, the V lamp 9G lights up (lights up) behind the part of the game board 2 drawn with "V", so that the part of the game board 2 drawn with "V" lights up (lights up). It's becoming The electric tube lamp 9H is arranged in the vicinity of the variable winning ball device 6B, and by lighting (lighting), the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B is lit (lighted).

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when lit (lighted), the stick controller 31A is lit (lighted). The trigger button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and lights up (lights up) the push button 31B.

The frame left lamp 9L is composed of a plurality of lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later with reference to FIG. 4) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights up (lights up), the lamp for the gaming machine The left side of the frame 3 is lit (lighted). The frame right lamp 9R is composed of a plurality of lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 4) provided on the right side of the game machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights (lights), the lamp for the game machine The right side of the frame 3 is lit (lighted). The frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as frame lamps. In addition, role lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric tube lamp 9H, stick controller lamp 9J, trigger button lamp 9K, frame left lamp 9L, and the frame right lamp 9R are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 as well.

FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment. Pachinko machine 1
A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the rear surface of the . A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big win and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at predetermined positions on the power supply board 17 (see FIG. 8).

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main substrate 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 8) is arranged at the side of the display monitor 29. As shown in FIG. The display monitor 29 may be constructed using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls that enter the large winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls won in the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the frame lamp. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps, frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12, extending counterclockwise from above to below the gaming machine frame 3. As shown in FIG. The frame left lamp 9L causes the vicinity of the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (12 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of eleven lamps, frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12, extending clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. As shown in FIG. The frame right lamp 9R causes the vicinity of the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example).

FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the special figure LED board 20 and the fourth symbol unit 50. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5(a), the special figure LED board 20 includes a special figure 1 variable display portion 21 showing the variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable display portion showing the variable display of the second special figure. 22, a special figure 1 storage display unit 23 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 memory display unit 24 indicating the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special figure game , a normal pattern storage display unit 25 showing the number of normal pattern pending storage, a normal pattern display unit 26 showing variable display of normal patterns, a right hitting display unit 30 prompting the player to hit right, and presence or absence of a probability variable state and the time saving display unit 29 indicating the presence or absence of the time saving state
and a round display part 27 showing the number of rounds of the big hit. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, the result, the current game state, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking by lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 22 indicates whether or not the second special figure is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop figure of the second special figure determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 20 can prompt the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED in the right hitting display section 30 . In this embodiment, when the player is urged to hit to the right, lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display unit 30 lights up (lights up), and when the player is not urged to hit to the right, That is, when prompting the player to hit left, lighting means such as an LED in the right hitting display section 30 is extinguished. After the design is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display lighting designation command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 30, and after the design is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. , a right-handed display extinguishing designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display unit 30 is extinguished. When the pachinko game machine 1 has a big win or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the big win game state, the effect control CPU 120 may light the right-handed display section 30 only during the big win round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 and turns off the right hitting display section 30 .

Here, hitting to the right means that the game ball is shot toward the second flow path out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. is to operate the hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow path is, for example, a path passing through the left area of the game area, and ahead of it is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This path does not have the second start winning opening formed in 6B. The second flow path is, for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area, and beyond that is a second start winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V grand prize opening) exist. When the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows through the first flow-down path toward the first start winning opening. When the player shoots the game ball toward the second flow-down path, the game ball passes through the second flow-down path and enters the second start winning opening or the big winning opening (normal big winning opening, V big winning opening). flow into.

In the present embodiment, in the jackpot game after the occurrence of the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot game (time-saving state and variable probability state), the player hits to the right, and is provided on the right side of the game area. The game ball is made to enter the second start winning opening and the big winning opening, and during that time, the right-handed display section 30 prompts the player to hit right. The player hits to the right while the display urging him to hit to the right is being displayed, causing the game balls to enter the second start winning opening and a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls to be paid out. The right of the second special game can be obtained, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out by entering the game balls into the normal big winning opening. Furthermore, as will be described later in detail, the V big winning opening is opened during the round of the probability variable jackpot. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and be controlled to the variable probability state. Therefore, by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is being displayed, the player can benefit overall. In addition, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to shoot the game ball toward the first flow-down path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the fourth symbol unit 50 includes a special figure 1 storage display unit 51 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 1 storage display unit 51 corresponding to the second special figure game. 2 Special figure 2 storage display unit 52 indicating the number of pending memories, Special figure 1 variable display unit 53 indicating the situation or display result of the variable display of the first special figure, The situation or display result of the variable display of the second special figure A special figure 2 variable display unit 54 showing and a right hitting display unit 55 prompting the player to hit right. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence/absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of reservations, and the instruction to hit to the right by lighting/flashing/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 53 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 54 indicates whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means.

Below, the variation display (variable display) of the first special symbol to represent the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 1 variable display portion 21 and the special figure 1 variable display portion 53 Also called In addition, representing the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 or the special figure 2 variable display unit 54 is also referred to as the variable display (variable display) of the second special symbol. called.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when prompting the player to hit to the right, lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 lights up (lights up) to indicate that the player should hit to the right. is not urged to the player, that is, when the player is urged to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display section 55 is extinguished. After the design is determined, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 55 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103, and the design is changed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After the determination, the right-handed display unit 55 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display extinguishing designation command from the CPU 103 . Incidentally, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a big win or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the big win game state, the effect control CPU 120 may light the right hitting display section 55 only during the big win round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the right hitting display section 55 based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103 .

FIG. 6 is a view looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be visually recognized. .

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the screen in the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays images such as variable display of decoration patterns and ready-to-win effects. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, decoration patterns (designs showing numbers etc.) as decoration identification information of a plurality of types different from the special patterns are displayed. etc.) is displayed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a first reserved memory display area 5D in which the number of reserved memories can be displayed by the number of circular reserved indications, and the number of second reserved memories is displayed by the number of reserved circular indications. A displayable second pending memory display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display being executed as an active display are provided.

At the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a fourth symbol 5J indicating that the special symbols are being variably displayed and the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories are displayed. At the left end of the screen of the image display device 5, a small pattern 5M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed. The small patterns are displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the "middle" decorative design display area 5C, and the "right" decorative design display area 5R. Patterns corresponding to each of the decorative patterns are vertically arranged in parallel. The small pattern 5M is also a pattern that is always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 without being hidden during the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 7, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is smaller in size than the decorative pattern at the left end of the screen of the image display device 5. are placed. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the shape of the screen of the image display device 5 is rectangular or substantially rectangular. It is fixed so as to cover it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7(b), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, part of the screen of the image display device 5 (especially the edge) is invisible or difficult to see due to the game board 2. It has become.

[Board configuration]
FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining various substrates and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, a power board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (for example, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have it.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 and a RAM (Random
Access Memory) 102, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and random number circuit 1
04, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 has, for example, an input port for receiving various signals (detection signals to be described later) and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 20 and the like, solenoid drive signals). and

The switch circuit 110 receives a detection signal ( A detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 .

The output circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, or the solenoid 83.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 30 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (
Including jackpot types. ), variation pattern used when running a special game (details will be described later)), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of pending memories, game state), commands specifying the occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating movable body 32, etc.) are executed by effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 etc., and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The fourth symbol unit 50 is connected to the effect control board 12 and is capable of lighting (blinking) each display part under the control of the control CPU 120 .

[Overview of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the configuration described above, the game progresses as follows. A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the special figure 1 variable display section 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the special figure 2 variable display section 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display portion 21 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, described later). The actual pattern differs depending on the type of the big win.) When the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the above is achieved, the "big win" is achieved. In addition, in the combination of lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 and the special figure 2 variable display section 22 of the special figure LED board 20, the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special pattern (big hit pattern) is also referred to as a "specific display result". In addition, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display portion 21 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a predetermined special pattern (small hit pattern) different from the big hit pattern ), it becomes a "small hit". In addition, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display portion 21 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a special pattern (loss) different from the big hit pattern and the small hit pattern. When the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the symbol) is achieved, it becomes "lost". In addition, special symbols (loss The lighting mode corresponding to the pattern) is also referred to as a "failure display result".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state. In addition, it is not necessary to necessarily provide a small hit as a hit type.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is either the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses or the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earliest timing. This predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (10 times or 7 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, the kind of big win is set in the "big win". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning mouth and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state at the time of some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning mouth is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning mouth is also the same etc.) to open the big prize mouth. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit kind.

After the jackpot game state is finished, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability variable state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period in which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time-saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the termination conditions, such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big win game state, is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as the number of times cut (number of times cut short time, number of times cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a probability variable state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case where the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability-high base state, a high-probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and a normal state is also called a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of the game effect lamp 9, It may be performed by turning off the light, by moving the movable body 32, or by using any rendering device including some or all of these.

As effects executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, normal reach, super reach with higher reliability of big hit than normal reach, and strongest reach with higher reliability of big hit than super reach. Also, the super reach can be divided into the first half of the super reach and the second half of the super reach. In the present embodiment, the reliability of the big hit is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the normal reach. Also, the reliability of the big win is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the latter half of the super reach than the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach. Also, the reliability of the big hit is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived with the strongest reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach. In addition, hereinafter, "super reach" is also referred to as "SP reach", "first half of super reach" is also referred to as "first half of SP", and "second half of super reach" is also referred to as "second half of SP".

When the display result of the special game is the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the "big hit" (specific display result described above), on the screen of the image display device 5, the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern is determined in advance. Determined decoration patterns that will be a big hit combination are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns is "big hit"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7") are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big win'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stop-displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is a combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the "small win", the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 becomes a predetermined small win combination. A fixed decoration pattern (for example, "1 3 5") is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern is a "minor win"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "jackpot" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it is a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of the lighting modes corresponding to "losing" (the above-mentioned losing display result), the variable display of the decorative pattern is not the ready-to-win mode, but the variable display of the decorative pattern. As a result of the display, the fixed decoration pattern of the non-reach combination (also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect that foretells the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that, during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small winning game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

[Various tables related to jackpots]
Various tables relating to big wins will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG.

(Hit type)
FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the hit types. As shown in FIG. 9, in the hit type table, for each type (type) of hit in the big win, the probability of big win after the end of the big win game state, the base after the end of the big win game state, and the number of times of opening in the big win ( number of rounds) is shown.

Specifically, as types of jackpots, normal jackpots 1 and 2 and variable probability jackpots 1 to 9 are provided. In addition, below, the mark of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth.

The normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after three rounds of jackpot game states are completed. In the normal jackpot 1, such a low-probability-high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is performed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

The normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low-probability state and a high-base state after three rounds of jackpot game states are completed. In the normal jackpot 2, such a low-probability-high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variable jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after three rounds of the jackpot game state are completed. In the probability variable jackpot 1, such a high probability/high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The variable probability big win 6 is a big win controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after five rounds of the big win game state are finished. In the probability variable jackpot 6, such a high probability/high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variable jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after seven rounds of jackpot game states are completed. In the probability variable jackpot 7, such a high probability/high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variable jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after 10 rounds of the jackpot game state are completed. In the probability variable jackpots 8 and 9, such a high probability/high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

(each random number)
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in FIG. 10, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random 1 is a hit determination random counter that determines whether or not to make a big win. Random 1 is, for example, updated by adding 1 from 1 to its upper limit of 65536, and then updated again from 1. Random 2 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type (type).

Random 3 and random 4 are random counters (for later variation pattern determination) that determine a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a later variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the later variation among the variation patterns. The post-fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the second half of the fluctuations in the special design. Random 3 is a random counter that determines the post-variation pattern corresponding to the time of failure. Updated. Random 4 is a random counter that determines a post-variation pattern corresponding to a hit.

Random 5 is a random counter (previous variation pattern determination) that determines a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a previous variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns. The previous fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the special symbol fluctuation. Random 5 is, for example, incremented by 1 from 1 to its upper limit of 251, and then incremented from 1 again. Random 6 is a random counter (for normal design hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal design. Random 6 is, for example, incremented by 1 from 1 to its upper limit of 201, and then incremented from 1 again.

In this embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1) whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Then, which one of the plurality of types of jackpots is selected is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2). At this time, the jackpot pattern may be determined based on the random 2 value.

Also, first, the post-variation pattern is determined according to the hit or loss using the post-variation pattern determination random number (random 3, 4), and the pre-variation pattern is determined using the pre-variation pattern determination random number (random 5). be done. Thus, in this embodiment, a variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

(Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the big-hit determination table and the big-hit type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101 .

FIG. 11(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which jackpot determination values to be compared with random 1 are set. The big hit determination table includes a normal (non-variable probability) big win determination table used in a normal state (game state not variable probability state, that is, non-variable probability state) and a variable probability big win determination table used in the variable probability state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are set by the number of determination values described in the upper column of FIG. A big hit judgment value is set for the number of judgment values described in . The jackpot judgment value set in the probability variable jackpot judgment table is the same as the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table. A larger number of jackpot determination values than the jackpot determination table are set. As a result, in the variable probability state, it is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1). If it coincides with the big hit determination value, it is determined to make a big win (normal big win or probability variable big win) with respect to the special symbol. In addition, FIG. 11(a) shows the probability (percentage) of winning or the probability (percentage) of losing.

11(b) and (c) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table. FIG. 11(b) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 11(c) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11(b), the numerical value to be compared with the random 2 value for jackpot type determination corresponds to each of the normal jackpots 1 and 2 and the probability variable jackpots 1 to 4. Judgment values are set for the number of judgment values that have been set. For example, as shown in FIG. 11(b), for the first special figure, the normal jackpot 1 is assigned 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and the normal jackpot 2 is assigned 100 random 2 values. 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values are assigned, variable jackpot 1 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and variable jackpot 2 is assigned 37 out of 100 random 2 values random 2 values are assigned, variable jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2, variable jackpot 4 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 value is assigned.

In the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 11 (c), the determination value is set as the number of determination values corresponding to each of the probability variable jackpots 5 to 9, which is the numerical value to be compared with the random 2 value. It is For example, as shown in FIG. 11(c), for the second special figure, the probability variable jackpot 5 is assigned 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and the probability variable jackpot 6 is assigned 100 random 2 values. 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values are assigned, variable jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and variable jackpot 8 is assigned 70 out of 100 random 2 values Random 2 values are assigned, and the probability variable jackpot 9 is 10
10 random 2 values out of 0 random 2 are assigned.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines a type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 2 matches as the jackpot type, and also determines the value of random 2 as the jackpot pattern. Determine the jackpot pattern. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

[Production control command]
FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the control board on the main side, transmits various production control commands to the production control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command is composed of, for example, two bytes, the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). Note that the command form shown in FIG. 12 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In the following description, "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in this specification.

The command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern that designates a variation pattern (previous variation pattern) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. command (XX corresponds to the number of the previous variation pattern). The previous variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the first half of the variation of the decoration design that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command corresponding to each of the previous variation patterns specified by the number.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special figure. When the command 8101 (H) or the command 8102 (H) is received, the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern that designates a variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. command (XX corresponds to the post-variation pattern number). The post-variation on the sub-side refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the decoration design that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command corresponding to each of the post-variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8C01(H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that it is determined to be a failure. The command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 1 is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 2 is determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (variable probability big hit 1 designation command) indicating that variable probability big hit 1 is determined. The command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (variable probability big hit 2 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 2 is determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (variable probability big hit 3 designation command) indicating that variable probability big hit 3 is determined. The command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (variable probability big hit 4 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 4 is determined. The command 8C08 (H) is a display result 8 designation command (variable probability big hit 5 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 5 is determined. Command 8C09 (H) is a display result 9 designation command (variable probability big hit 6 designation command) indicating that variable probability big hit 6 is determined. The command 8C10 (H) is a display result 10 designation command (variable probability big hit 7 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 7 is determined. The command 8C11 (H) is a display result 11 designation command (variable probability big hit 8 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 8 is determined. The command 8C12 (H) is a display result 12 designation command (variable probability big hit 9 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 9 is determined. Loss designation commands, normal jackpot 1, 2 designation commands, and probability variable jackpot 1-9 designation commands, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8C system commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special figure. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special figure. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates display of the initial screen at power-on) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery specification command that specifies recovery from power failure (specifies display of a power failure recovery screen) that is transmitted when power supply to the game machine is resumed. A command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating a normal state background. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probability changing state designation command that designates the background of the probability changing state. Each of the normal state designation command, the time saving state designation command, and the variable probability state designation command, or these are collectively referred to as the 95 series command or the background designation command. A command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of the normal jackpot 1. The command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command for designating the start of the normal jackpot 2 . Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 1 . Command A004 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 4 specification command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 2 . Command A005 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 5 designation command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 3. The command A006 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 6 designation command that designates the start of the probability variable jackpot 4 . Command A007 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 7 specification command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 5 . Command A008 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 8 designation command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 6 . Command A009 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 9 specification command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 7 . Command A010 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 10 designation command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 8 . The command A011 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 11 specification command that designates the start of the probability variable jackpot 9 . Each of the jackpot start 1 to 11 designation commands, or collectively these commands are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command for specifying during the opening of the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designation command during the opening of the big winning opening is also referred to as an A1 system command. A2XX(H) is a post-opening designation command for the large winning opening that indicates closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after the opening of the big winning opening is also called an A2 series command.

The command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of the normal jackpot 1. The command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of the normal jackpot 2 . Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 1 . Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 2 . Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 4 . Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 5 . Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 6 . Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 7 . The command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command that designates the end of the probability variable jackpot 8 . Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 9 . Each of the jackpot end 1 to 11 designation commands, or collectively these commands are also called A3 series commands.

Command AD00 (H) is a variable probability determination device passing designation command that designates that a V prize has occurred. The probability variation determination device passage specification command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24 .

Command B100 (H) is a first start prize designation command that designates that there has been a first start prize. Command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command that designates that there has been a second start prize.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved storage number designating command that designates that the first reserved storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved storage number designation command is also called a C1-type command. The command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that designates that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserve storage number designation command is also called a C2-type command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are the contents of the judgment results at the time of winning such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, variation pattern type judgment at the time of start winning to the first start winning mouth or second start winning mouth It is a production control command shown. Among them, the command C4XX(H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big hit will be made and the judgment result of the kind of big win among the results of determination at the time of winning.

C7XX(H) is a large winning opening designation command indicating passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display extinguishing command indicating extinguishing of the right-handed display. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In the present embodiment, especially the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD system command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big win will occur, the type of the big win, and the range of judgment values of the variation pattern type judging random number at the time of starting winning. Then, a value designating a big hit and a value designating the type of big win are set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, and control is performed to transmit them to the effect control CPU 120 . In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as the determination result of the variation pattern type to the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can recognize the type of the big win, and can recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

[Variation pattern]
Contents of the variation pattern, determination of the variation pattern, and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 19. FIG.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100, which is the main side, sets a plurality of types of variation patterns. Each variation pattern is managed by a main variation number, and is composed of a combination of a pre-variation pattern, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the pre-variation, and a post-variation pattern, which corresponds to the post-variation. It is designed to contain The previous variation pattern corresponds to the previous variation pattern command (80XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. 12, and the later variation pattern corresponds to the later variation pattern command (84XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. corresponds to

(Previous fluctuation pattern on the main side)
FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a previous variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of pre-variation patterns to which the pre-variation numbers are respectively assigned, the pre-variation number 1 is a pre-variation pattern command (8000 (H)) that designates a normal variation (for example, a variation in the decorative pattern over 13 seconds) is. The previous variation number 2 is a previous variation pattern command (8001 (H)) that designates a shortened variation (for example, a variation of decorative patterns over 7 seconds). The previous variation number 3 is a previous variation pattern command (8002 (H)) that designates super-shortening variation (for example, variation of decoration pattern over 3 seconds).

The previous variation number 4 is a previous variation pattern command (8003(H)) that designates normal reach (accessory x) (ready in which the movable body 32 does not move in the reach mode). The previous variation number 5 is a previous variation pattern command (8004 (H)) that designates normal reach (character ○) (reach in which the movable body 32 moves in the reach mode). The previous variation number 6 is a previous variation pattern command (8005 (H)) that designates normal reach (final reach development) (reach that becomes a reach mode and develops to the final reach).

Pre-variation number 7 is a pre-variation pattern command (8006 (H)) that specifies executing normal reach (character ×) after performing pseudo-variation once. Pseudo-variation means that the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted from the start of the variable display (variable display) of the decorative pattern until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. It is a variable display (variable display). An effect that repeats such a pseudo-variation is also called a pseudo-run. By executing the pseudo-continuation, the variable display based on one reserved memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of pseudo-variable displays. Note that the variable display resumed after being temporarily stopped is also referred to as “re-variable display”. Pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007 (H)) that designates execution of normal reach (character ○) after one pseudo-variation. Pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008 (H)) that designates normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo-variation.

Pre-variation number 10 is a pre-variation pattern command (8009 (H)) that specifies to execute normal reach (character ×) after performing pseudo-variation twice. Pre-variation number 11 is a pre-variation pattern command (800A(H)) that designates execution of normal reach (character ○) after performing pseudo-variation twice. The previous variation number 12 is a previous variation pattern command (800B(H)) that designates normal reach (final reach development) after performing pseudo variation twice.

Each of the previous variation patterns has a specified variation time, and an animation (moving image) is displayed on the image display device 5 over each variation time. Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (referred to as a frame) constituting a moving image. For example, in the case of the patterns of previous variation numbers 7 to 9, the variation time is set to 41500 mse, and the number of frames is approximately 1246 frames. In the case of the patterns of the previous variation numbers 10 to 12, the variation time is set to 62000 mse, and the number of frames is approximately 1861 frames.

(Post-fluctuation pattern on the main side)
FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of post-variation patterns to which post-variation numbers are assigned, post-variation number 1 is a post-variation pattern command (8400 (H)) that designates a 13-second variation. Post-variation number 2 is a post-variation pattern command (8401(H)) that designates a 7-second variation. Post-variation number 3 is a post-variation pattern command (8402(H)) specifying a 3-second variation. Post-variation number 4 is a post-variation pattern command (8403(H)) that designates execution of a pseudo-repeating sequence. Pseudo-continuum is an effect that pretends to execute a pseudo-continuum but does not execute the pseudo-continuum after all.

Post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404 (H)) that designates normal reach (losing) (variation of decorative pattern that becomes a loss mode without developing into SP reach although it becomes a reach mode). Post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that designates the first half of SP (losing) (variation of decorative pattern that develops into SP reach but loses in the first half of SP reach). The post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that designates the second half of the SP (loss) (the variation of the decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of the SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the latter half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407 (H)) that designates the final reach (loss) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes a loss mode in the final reach).

The post-variation number 9 is a post-variation pattern command (8408(H)) that designates normal reach (hit) (variation of decoration pattern that becomes a reach state and becomes a hit state). The post-variation number 10 is a post-variation pattern command (8409 (H)) that designates the SP first half (hit) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the SP reach and becomes a hit mode in the first half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 11 is a post-variation pattern command (840A(H)) that designates the second half of the SP (hit) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of the SP reach and becomes a hit mode in the latter half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 12 is a post-variation pattern command (840B(H)) that designates the final reach (hit) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach and becomes a winning mode in the final reach).

(Determination of post-fluctuation pattern)
The post-variation pattern is determined using different random counters depending on whether a big win or a loss is determined in the big win determination. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of losing. As shown in FIG. 15, when it is determined to be a loss in the big hit determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using random 3 described in FIG. Furthermore, when it is determined to be a loss in the big hit determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using different determination values according to the number of pending memories after digestion, and the determined post-variation number is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), when the number of retained memories after digestion is 0, one of the post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, A different number of judgment values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is 1, any post-variation pattern is determined from post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is 2, one of the post-variation numbers 2, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is 3, any post-variation pattern is determined from post-variation numbers 3, 4, 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

In this way, a post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values according to the number of retained memories after digestion, and a post-variation number is determined using a different number of judgment values according to the number of retained memories after digestion. Therefore, the type of variation pattern changes according to the number of remaining reserved memories, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game and improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 16, when a big win is determined in the big win determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using random 4 described in FIG. Furthermore, when a big win is determined in the big win determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using different determination value numbers according to the type of the big win.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16(a), when the normal jackpot 1, 2 or the probability variable jackpot 1, 2, 5-8 is determined, one of the post-variation numbers 9-12 posterior variation patterns are determined, and a different decision value number is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1/1.1.

When one of the probability variable jackpots 3 and 9 is determined, one of the post-variation patterns is determined from among the post-variation numbers 9 to 12, and different judgment values are provided for each of the post-variation patterns. . The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When the probability variable jackpot 4 is determined, one of the post-variation numbers 9 to 12 is determined, and different judgment values are provided for each of the post-variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

In this way, since the post-variation pattern is determined using different judgment value numbers according to the type of the big win, the kind of the variation pattern changes according to the kind of the big win, thereby adding variety to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15, the probability of being determined to be one of the fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 after developing into the SP reach or the final reach is about 1/102 at the time of losing, whereas the big hit Since the time is about 1/1.1, which is higher than that, the player can expect a big win in the event of SP reach or final reach.

(Determination of previous fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the previous variation pattern determination table. The pre-variation pattern is determined using a different number of random 5 judgment values depending on the type of the pre-determined post-variation pattern. Furthermore, the determined pre-variation number differs depending on the type of post-variation pattern that has been previously determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17( a ), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 1 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17(b), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined, the pre-fluctuation pattern of pre-fluctuation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17(c), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 3 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17(d), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 4 is determined, the pre-fluctuation pattern of pre-fluctuation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 17(e), when either of the post-fluctuation patterns of post-fluctuation numbers 5 and 9 is determined, the pre-fluctuation pattern of pre-fluctuation numbers 4 and 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17(f), when any of the post-variation patterns of post-variation numbers 6 and 10 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of any of pre-variation numbers 4, 7 and 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17(g), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 7 is determined, the pre-fluctuation pattern of any of pre-fluctuation numbers 5, 8, and 11 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 17(h), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 11 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of any of pre-variation numbers 5, 8, and 11 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17(i), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 8 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation number 6, 9 or 12 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17(j), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 12 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation number 6, 9 or 12 is determined.

(total fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. When the post-variation pattern and the pre-variation pattern are determined as described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17, one of the variation patterns of main variation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in FIG. 18 is obtained.

FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the sub side. Furthermore, on the sub-side, the variation patterns of sub variation numbers 1-26 are determined so as to correspond to the variation patterns of main variation numbers 1-26, respectively.

[Each notice production]
FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table for each advance notice effect. In the present embodiment, there is a case where the advance notice effect is executed to suggest that the display result of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols will be a predetermined jackpot symbol. The notice effect is also a effect that suggests or foretells the occurrence of a big win, and a effect that makes the player expect a big win. The advance notice effect includes a group advance notice effect (also referred to as a group notice or a group effect) and an SP first half title notice effect (also referred to as an SP first half title notice).

The group preview effect is a effect of displaying an image in which a plurality of objects progress in a group. The plurality of objects includes characters such as people, fish, and animals, and machines such as airplanes and cars, as long as they progress. One type of object such as a character may be used, or a plurality of types may be used. A pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a plurality of types of group announcement performances. Specifically, six characters dressed as maids advance as a group, and a group of mouse characters with bomb bodies named Bakuchu advance as a group. A Boingo group announcement in which characters named Boingo proceed in groups can be performed.

In the present embodiment, whether or not the group notice effect is executed by the group notice lottery when the post-variation patterns of numbers 6 to 8 and 10 to 12 that develop into SP reach and final reach are determined. and the type of group announcement effect to be executed is determined.

FIG. 20(a) shows a lottery table for executing group advance lottery in stage A. FIG. In this embodiment, even if the variable display is performed based on the same variation pattern, there are provided a plurality of types of stages with mutually different production modes (background images, BGM, sound effects, appearing characters, etc.). . Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, Stage A is a stage in which an effect is performed by a character called Yume-chan, who is one of the six characters dressed as maids.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), when the post-variation pattern of numbers 6 to 8 corresponding to the loss is determined, the group announcement effect is executed with a probability of 15%, and among them, the probability of 6 is 13%. It is decided to announce the crowd, and it is decided to announce the Boingo group with a probability of 2%. In addition, when the post-variation pattern of numbers 10 to 12 corresponding to the hit is determined, the group announcement effect is executed with a probability of 85%, of which, the 6-person group announcement is decided with a probability of 55%, and 30%. It is decided to announce the Boingo group with a probability of .

Here, considering that the probability of losing is about 319/320, and the probability of being determined to be a later variation pattern of later variation numbers 6 to 8 is about 1/102, the probability of variation numbers 6 to 8 being lost is about 1/102. The probability of being determined to the post-fluctuation pattern is about 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group announcement will be executed is about 15%, so the probability that the group announcement will be executed at the time of losing is about 0.15%. On the other hand, considering that the probability of winning a big hit is about 1/320, and the probability of being determined as a post-variation pattern of post-variation numbers 10 to 12 is approximately 1/1.1, variation numbers 10-12 is about 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group announcement will be executed is about 85%, so the probability that the group announcement will be executed at the time of winning is about 0.27%. Therefore, the probability (reliability, expectation) of winning a big hit when the group notice is executed is about 64%. Note that the reliability (expectation) of the group announcement is not limited to 64%, and if it exceeds 50%, the player can expect a big win by executing it.

FIG. 20(b) shows a lottery table for executing the group advance lottery in stage B. As shown in FIG. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, stage B is a stage in which an effect is performed by a character named Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 20(b), when the post-variation pattern of numbers 6 to 8 corresponding to the loss is determined, the group announcement effect is executed with a probability of 10%, of which the probability of explosion is 8%. It is decided to announce the Chu group, and it is decided to announce the Boingo group with a probability of 2%. Further, when the post-variation pattern of numbers 10 to 12 corresponding to the win is determined, the group announcement performance is executed with a probability of 90%, and the group announcement effect is determined with a probability of 60%. It will be determined by the Boingo group notice with a probability of %.

Here, as described above, the probability of being determined as the later variation pattern of variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss is about 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 10%, so the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of losing is about 0.10%. On the other hand, the probability of being determined to the variation pattern after variation numbers 10 to 12 at the time of winning is about 1/320. and,
In this case, the probability that the group announcement will be executed is about 90%, so the probability that the group announcement will be executed at the time of winning is about 0.28%. Therefore, the probability (reliability, expectation) of winning a big hit when the group notice is executed is about 74%. Note that the reliability (expectation) of the group announcement is not limited to 74%, and if it exceeds 50%, the player can expect a big win by executing it.

The advance notice of the first half of the SP title is an effect suggesting that when the game develops into the SP reach, the display mode of the character image indicating the title of the first half of the SP reach will result in a big hit. In this embodiment, the display of the character image of the first half of the SP title is executed in both stage A and stage B. only executed. Note that even in the case of stage A, an advance notice effect that changes the display mode of the character image of the first half of the SP title may be executed.

In the present embodiment, whether or not the SP first half title notice is executed in the SP first half title notice lottery when it is determined to be the after fluctuation pattern of the after fluctuation numbers 6 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach. , and the type of SP first half title announcement to be executed is determined.

As shown in FIG. 20(c), when the post-variation pattern of 6 to 8 corresponding to the loss is determined, the SP first half title notice is executed with a probability of 20%, and the post-variation number corresponding to the hit. If it is determined to be the change pattern after 10 to 12, the SP first half title announcement will be executed with a probability of 80%.

Here, as described above, the probability of being determined as the later variation pattern of variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss is about 1/102. In this case, the probability that the SP first half title announcement will be executed is about 20%, so the probability that the SP first half title announcement will be executed at the time of losing is about 0.20%. On the other hand, the probability of being determined to be the variation pattern after variation numbers 10 to 12 at the time of winning is about 1/320. In this case, the probability that the SP first half title announcement will be executed is about 80%, so the probability that the SP first half title announcement will be executed at the time of winning is about 0.25%. Therefore, the probability (reliability, expectation) of winning a big hit when the SP first half title notice is executed is about 56%. The reliability (expectation) of the SP first half title announcement is not limited to 56%, and if it exceeds 50%, the player can expect a big win by executing it.

In this way, the reliability (expectation of the big hit) in the group announcement is 64% (in the case of stage A) and 74% (in the case of stage B), whereas the reliability in the SP first half title announcement (the expectation of the big hit) The degree of expectation) is 56%, and the group notice is more reliable than the SP first half title notice. Therefore, when the group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the SP first half title notice is executed, and the player feels that the group notice is executed rather than the SP first half title notice. have come to expect

In addition, the Boingo group notice in stage A is executed only with a probability of 2% at the time of losing, but is executed with a probability of 30% at the time of winning, so when the Boingo group notice is executed , there is a high possibility that it is almost a jackpot. On the other hand, the 6-person group notice in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% at the time of loss, but is executed with a probability of 55% at the time of winning, so even if the 6-person group notice is executed, it will be lost. is more likely than the Boingo group herald. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the players is higher than when the six-person group notice is executed, and the players feel that the Boingo group notice is executed rather than the six-person group notice. have come to expect

Similarly, the Boingo group notice in stage B is executed only with a probability of 2% at the time of loss, but is executed with a probability of 30% at the time of winning, so when the Boingo group notice is executed is likely to be a big hit. On the other hand, the Bakuchu group notice in stage B is executed with a probability of 8% at the time of losing, but is executed with a probability of 60% at the time of winning, so the Bakuchu group notice is executed. There is a greater possibility that this is also a failure than the Boingo group announcement. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the Bakuchu group notice is executed, and the player feels that the Boingo group notice is executed rather than the Bakuchu group notice. It is expected that

Further, the announcement of the 6-person group in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% at the time of losing, but is executed with a probability of 55% at the time of winning. On the other hand, the explosive chew group notice in stage B is executed with a probability of 8% at the time of losing, but is executed with a probability of 60% at the time of winning. For this reason, the explosive chew group notice in stage B is more often executed at the time of a big hit than the six-person group notice in stage A. As a result, when the Bakuchu group notice is executed in stage B, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the six-person group notice is executed in stage A, and the players are more likely to be six than the six-person group notice. It is expected that the crowd notice will be executed.

Note that the reliability of the group announcement at stage A and the reliability of the group announcement at stage B may be designed to be the same. In this case, both the group notice in stage A and the group notice in stage B should be more reliable than the SP first half title notice. It is good if the reliability is high.

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern process processing)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 21, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), and settings for making the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, the ON state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

When the restoration condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step S5) after executing the restoration process (step S4). The CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S6) and then the setting change process (step S7). The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of the game ball by operating the batted ball operation handle 30, detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped. It is sufficient to perform control so that a display corresponding to is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, the CPU 103 stores (updates) the setting values displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by the operation of the game hall attendant or the like. The display monitor 29 is turned off. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch 92 is ON, the initialization process of step S6 The setting change process of step S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. . If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is OFF when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is OFF, and if the clear switch 92 is ON, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. While it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt. (Step S10). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt processing for game control shown in FIG. 22 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110, and It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main-side error process to diagnose an abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and makes it possible to issue a warning according to the diagnosis result if necessary (step S22). After that, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output process so that, for example, the big win information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big wins, etc.) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the starting Data such as information (information indicating the number of start-up wins, etc.) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the odds have changed) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S
25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the general pattern game is performed by driving the general pattern display unit 26, and the number of general pattern reservations is displayed by lighting the general pattern storage display unit 25. FIG.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Special pattern process processing)
FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol process processing. The special symbol process processing is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining variation patterns based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern It specifies the content of the production (such as the type of reach production), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 stop the variation of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "losing", when it is controlled in the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to, for example, which type of jackpot is selected. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big win, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the probability of winning a big win. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6) may be provided. A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the starting winning determination process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (step S51). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is ON (Y in step S51), the number of first special figure pending memories, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S52). CPU103, for example by reading the first reservation storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient to specify the number of first special figure reservation storage. When the number of the first special figure reserved storage is not the upper limit value in step S52 (N in step S52), for example, the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1". (Step S53).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit in step S52 (Y in step S52), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S54). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), the number of second special figure pending memories, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S55). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient to specify the second special figure reservation storage number. When the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value in step S55 (N in step S55), for example, the storage value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2". (Step S56).

After executing either of the processes of step S53 and step S56, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step S57). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", 1 is added to the first reserved storage number count value, while when the starting buffer value is "2", 1 is added to the second reserved storage number count value. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step S58). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section (not shown), may be updated so as to add one.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 selects the random number random number 1 for judging a big hit or the The numerical data representing the random number random number 2 and the random number random number numbers 3 and 4 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (step S59). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers random 1 to random 4 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), while the start buffer value is "2". At some point, numerical data indicating random number random 1 to random 4 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number random number 1 for judging the big hit and the random number random number 2 for judging the type of big hit determine whether the fluctuation display result of the special pattern or decorative pattern is "big hit", and whether the fluctuation display result is "big hit". It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number random numbers 3 and 4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results of the special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step S59, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step S60). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", the performance control board 12 stores the storage address of the first start winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. to send the first start winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting mouth buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, etc. 2 Make settings for sending the start winning designation command. The start winning designation command set in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be.

Following the processing of step S60, CPU 103 saves the random value in the save area corresponding to the reserved storage (step S61). After that, the CPU 103 clears the start buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the start prize determination process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 25, in the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 is a first reserved storage buffer (storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the first special symbol) or a second reserved storage buffer (of the second special symbol It is determined whether or not there is reserved storage data in a storage buffer for storing reserved storage information (step S1001). If there is no reserved storage data in either the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (N in step S1001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stopped (step S1002). When the predetermined period does not pass from the fluctuation stop (N in step S1002), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step S1003), and the special symbol normal process ends. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, after transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt, based on the fact that the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is set, the customer It is controlled so as not to send the wait demo designation command. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is reset when the variable display of the next special symbol is started.

When there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether or not it is data (step S1004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "second" (that is, the data indicating the "first") (N in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets the special symbol pointer (the Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for a second special symbol (step S1005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006 ).

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special The variable display of the pattern is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

By the control of steps S1004 to S1006, if there is even one data of the second reserved storage in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage is displayed in the second 1 It is executed with priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the reserved storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the saving area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer is read out and stored in the reserve storage buffer of RAM 102 .
Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in a pending storage buffer in RAM 102 .

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reservation storage buffer of the RAM 102 Store the random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103, based on the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction, performs control to transmit the reserved storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 ( step S1009). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step S1010), reads random R (random number for judging a big hit) from the reserve storage buffer, and executes a judging module for a big hit (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for judging a big hit, which is extracted in the starting winning judging process and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and judges the big win. The big-hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined big-hit determination value (see FIG. 10) with a big-hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a big-hit if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit.

In the process of judging a big hit, when the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than when the game state is a non-variable probability state (normal game state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and the number of jackpot determination values is set in a probability variable jackpot determination table (a table in which the numbers in the lower column of FIG. 11 (a) are set). A normal jackpot determination table (a table in which numerical values in the upper column of FIG. 11(a) are set) is provided, which is set to be smaller than the jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is the variable probability state, and when the gaming state is the variable probability state, performs the processing for judging the big hit using the variable probability big hit determination table, and the game state is normal. When it is in the state or the time-saving state, the judgment of the big hit is processed using the normal big-hit judgment table. That is, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit when the value of the big-hit determination random number (random 1) matches one of the big-hit determination values shown in FIG. 11(a). If it is determined to be a big hit (Y in step S1011), the process moves to step S1012. Determining whether or not to make a big win means determining whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but it also means determining whether or not the stop symbols in the special symbols are to be the big winning symbols. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is the variable probability state is performed by whether or not the variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the game state is shifted to the variable probability state, and is reset when ending the variable probability state. Specifically, the variable probability flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times) and the condition that the next big hit is determined. It is reset at the timing of ending the variable display of the special symbols and stop-displaying the stop symbols when either of the earlier conditions is established.

If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1015, which will be described later.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the big hit determination values in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit (step S1012). It should be noted that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of jackpot types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11(b) and the second special symbol jackpot type of FIG. 11(c) Select one of the determination tables. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 11(b). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 11(c). Then, the CPU 103 reads the random number for judging the type of jackpot that is extracted in the starting winning judgment process and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and stores it in the reserve memory buffer using the selected jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type and jackpot pattern corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2) for judging the jackpot type are determined (step S1013).

Moreover, CPU103 sets the big-hit classification data which show the determined big-hit classification to the big-hit classification buffer in RAM102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a special symbol stop symbol (step S1015). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot pattern determined in step S1014 is set as the special pattern stop pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result specifying command (step S1016), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 26, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a post-variation pattern based on randoms 3 and 4 according to the number of pending memories and the presence or absence of a big hit (step S1101). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG.
A post-variation pattern is determined based on the value of . Further, in the case of a big hit, the CPU 103 selects a post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. decide.

Next, CPU 103 determines a previous variation pattern based on random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the previous fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. determine the pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (previous variation pattern and back variation pattern) to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a variable time timer formed in the RAM 102 to a value corresponding to the variable time corresponding to the selected variable pattern (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S1106).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the special symbol. The value corresponding to the stop processing (step S113) is updated (step S1203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 28, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbols, and displays the stop symbol on the special figure 1 variable display section 21 or the special figure 2 variable display section 22. Control for derived display is performed (step S1301). In addition, when data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 is ended, and "second" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display section 22 is terminated. In addition, a symbol determination designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 . Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). Then, when the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the variable probability flag and the time saving flag (step S1304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1305).

In addition, referring to the opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, the number of times of opening (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), the interval between rounds Data indicating the release mode such as the interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1306). For example, in the case of the 3rd round normal jackpot, the RAM 10 stores the opening mode for opening the normal big winning opening in all of the 1st to 3rd rounds.
2 in a predetermined storage area. In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 4th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加In addition, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big winning opening in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 9th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加. Data on the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Also, a value corresponding to the fanfare time, which is the time for displaying the big win (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win on the image display device 5), is set to the big winning hole control timer (step S1307). Thereafter, in the big win opening pre-processing, the big winning hole control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the big winning hole is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the process is terminated.

When it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set in step S1303 (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S1309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process proceeds to step S1316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), 1 is subtracted from the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the number of remaining fluctuations in the time saving state (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter has reached 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step S1312). As a result, when the variable display resulting in the losing display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time saving state, the game state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. In step S1311, when the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step S1311), the process proceeds to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is set (step S1313). When the probability variation flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability variation flag is reset (step S1314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the fact that the game state has shifted from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step S1315), to step S1316. move on. If the variable probability flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process proceeds to step S1315 without performing the process of step S1314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process is terminated.

(Jackpot opening pretreatment)
FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the big hit opening pre-processing. As shown in FIG. 29, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process is terminated.

When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a special winning opening open designating command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, according to the opening pattern, the solenoid 82 is driven to open the normal big winning opening (step S1404). As a result, the normal big winning opening is opened in the first round.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step S1306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning hole control timer to the maximum time (large winning hole opening time) during which the big winning hole can be opened. The corresponding big winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set (step S1405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated (step S1406) to a value corresponding to the process during big hit opening (step S115), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the process during jackpot opening. As shown in FIG. 30, in the process during the opening of the big win, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (renews by subtraction) (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big winning hole control timer has reached 0 (step S1502). When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N in step S1502), it is determined whether or not the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (step S1503). Whether or not the normal big winning slot or the V big winning slot is open may be determined by the value of the opening number counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the normal big winning opening or the V big winning opening is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the normal big prize opening or the V big prize opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is turned on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 24 is turned on (N in step S1504), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is ON (Y in step S1504), the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (updated by addition) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the variable probability state is controlled when the V winning occurs. If the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the variable probability determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not turned on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step S1507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1508), the probability variation determination device passage specification command is transmitted (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510 do.

Then, CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach the predetermined number (N in step S1510), the process is terminated.

When the value of the winning number counter reaches a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal big winning opening, or to drive the solenoid 83 to close the V big winning opening. is closed (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing (setting to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening post-processing (step S116) (step S1513),
End the process.

(Post-processing after opening the jackpot)
FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the process after opening the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 31, in the jackpot opening post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening number counter is 0 (step S1601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1602), and the jackpot end time (that the jackpot game has ended) is set to the big win opening control timer. For example, the time to be notified in the image display device 5) is set (step S1603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (step S117) (step S1604), End the process.

In step S1601, if the value of the number-of-opening counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a designated command after opening the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the round starts in the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the round (also referred to as the V opening round) in which the V big winning opening is opened (also referred to as the V opening round), that is, the next round is the V opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 and open the normal big winning opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 83 and open the V big winning opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 transmits a special winning opening open specification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the process during big hit opening (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot ending process. As shown in FIG. 32, in the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end control timer to which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process is terminated. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the big hit flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a variable probability determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1704), the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step S1707). Next, the variable probability state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1708), the variable probability determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S1710), and 150 is set to the time saving frequency counter (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, in step S1704, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), in step S1705, the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S1705), and 100 is set to the time saving counter. (step S1706), and the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize whether it is in any game state, variable probability, short time, or normal, by a variable probability state designation command or the like transmitted from the CPU 103 .

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described.

(Production control main processing)
In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33 is executed. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect control main process. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, CTC register settings. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to emit a prohibit command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (Y at step S73)
, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 for the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect control process processing. The effect control process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 34, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative patterns is read out from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of fixed decorative patterns is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . When receiving a performance control command designating the start of the big win game state, if the command designates the start of the big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot gaming state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In this jackpot middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the effect contents in the big win game state, and executes various effect control in the big win game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "5" which is the value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in FIG. 35, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the result of the variable display is determined to be lost (step S7101). If the effect control CPU 120 is determined to be lost, it checks whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received as the variation pattern command (step S7103).

When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received, the effect control CPU 120 uses the losing pattern determination data table to determine the display result of the losing pattern that does not become the reach as the final stop of the effect pattern (step S7105), and proceeds to step S7106.

When it is determined that it is not a non-reach variation pattern in the process of step S7103 (when it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), the stop design of the effect design constituting the combination of reach design is determined (step S7104), and step S7106. proceed to

In addition, when it is not determined to be a loss in the process of step S7101 (when it is determined to be a big hit), the effect control CPU 101 forms a combination of big win symbols according to the type of the big win. A stop design of the effect design is determined (step S7102), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after execution of effect setting processing (step S7106) for setting various effects in variable display (for example, group announcement setting process, etc.), the process proceeds to step S7107.

In step S7107, the production control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of production control patterns. In step S7107, according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, and the various production control (production operation) patterns specified by the production control pattern of the production determined in the process of step S7106, the pattern fluctuation control One of a plurality of types of pattern variation control patterns stored in a pattern table, one of which corresponds to various designated performance operation patterns is selected and determined as a use pattern.

In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 121, for example, the performance symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of the variation of the performance symbols to the stop display of the fixed performance symbols that are the final stop symbols. Data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as variable display operation, production display operation in ready-to-win production, production display operation by simulated series production, and production display operation in advance notice production are stored in multiple types as pattern variation control patterns. It is

In addition, each symbol variation control pattern is, for example, effect control process timer set value, effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, and end code, such as effect symbol fluctuation display Including the control data for controlling the corresponding various production operations, chronologically, the contents of various production control, switching timing of production control and the like are set.

Next, a process table corresponding to the production control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After the processing of step S7109 is executed, according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data), production devices (image display device 5 as production parts, various lamps as production parts, Then, the control of the speakers 8L and 8R) as performance parts is started (step S7110). For example, according to the display control execution data, a command is output to display an image (including effect symbols) corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of light emitters such as various LEDs. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

(Group notice setting process)
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of group announcement setting processing. The group advance notice setting process is a process included in the variable display start setting process (step S171).

As shown in FIG. 36, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a variation pattern command capable of executing the group announcement is received (step S7061). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a variation pattern command including a variation pattern after variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of losing, and a variation pattern including a variation pattern after variation numbers 10 to 12 at the time of winning. Determine whether or not a command has been received. In addition, the fluctuation patterns including the post fluctuation patterns of post fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 are the fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 8 to 15, and the fluctuation patterns including the post fluctuation patterns of post fluctuation numbers 10 to 12 are the main fluctuation number 18 ~26 variation patterns.

If the effect control CPU 120 has not received a variation pattern command capable of executing the group announcement (N in step S7061), the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command capable of executing group notice (Y in step S7061), it converts the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command into the number of frames (step S7062). For example, in the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 22, since the pre-variation time is 41500 msec, the number of frames is about 1246, and the post-variation time is 91900 msec, so the number of frames is about 3000. For example, in the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 26, the pre-variation time is 62000 msec, so the number of frames is about 1861, and the post-variation time is 142800 msec, so the number of frames is about 4288. .

The effect control CPU 120 executes a group advance notice lottery (step S7063). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses the group notice lottery table shown in FIGS. determine the type of

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a group announcement lottery is won. The effect control CPU 120 terminates the process when the group announcement lottery is not won (N in step S7064). On the other hand, when the group announcement lottery is won (Y in step S7064), the effect control CPU 120 extracts an effect control pattern for group announcement execution corresponding to the stage (step S7065), and ends the process.

For example, as shown in example 1, in the case of the variation pattern of the main variation number 22 and in the case of stage A, the effect control is performed so that the group notice is executed from the 985th frame out of the 1246 frames in the previous variation. A pattern is set. Also, in the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 22 and in the case of stage B, the effect control pattern is set such that the group announcement is executed from the 1385th frame out of the 3000 frames in the post-variation.

For example, as shown in example 2, in the case of the variation pattern of the main variation number 26 and in the case of stage A, the effect control is performed so that the group notice is executed from the 1600th frame out of the 1861 frames in the previous variation. A pattern is set. In the case of the variation pattern of the main variation number 26 and in the case of stage B, the effect control pattern is set so that the group announcement is executed from the 2000th frame among the 4288 frames in the post-variation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of stage A, the group announcement is executed in the front movement, but in the case of stage B, the group announcement is executed in the rear movement. there is

(Group notice execution processing)
FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of group announcement execution processing. The group announcement execution process is a process included in the effect process during variable display (step S172).

As shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts one frame at a time from the number of frames corresponding to the effect control pattern set in the variable display start setting process (step S7201). For example, when the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the main variation number 26 is set, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts one frame from the 6149th frame, which is the total number of frames.

The effect control CPU 120 terminates the process when the effect control pattern for executing the group announcement is not set (N in step S7202). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, when setting the effect control pattern for group announcement execution (Y in step S7202), determines whether or not the frame of the group announcement execution timing has been reached (S7203). For example, in the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 26 and in stage A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the 1600th frame has been reached.

The effect control CPU 120 ends the process when the frame of the execution timing of the group announcement has not been reached (N in step S7203). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, when reaching the frame of the execution timing of the group announcement (Y in step S7203), controls various effect devices in order to execute the group announcement (step S7204). For example, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for lighting, blinking, or extinguishing the game effect lamp 9 based on a group notice lighting table shown in FIGS. Performs control for outputting sound. After that, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the process.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first shoots a game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left side area of the game area by hitting to the left. When the launched game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 21 becomes a display mode showing a big win pattern, a big win occurs.

The types of jackpots in the first special game include normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probability variable jackpots 1 to 4, as described above. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-handed promotion performance is executed to urge the player to hit to the right. As a right-handed promotion effect, a character (for example, "Right-handed") and a graphic (for example, an arrow pointing rightward, which is the direction of the second flow path) are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition to displaying the image, the hitting to the right display section 30 of the special figure LED board 20 and the hitting to the right display section 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 are urged to hit to the right by lighting means such as LEDs. As a result, the player will hit to the right from then on.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times in the case of a 3R normal jackpot, and 10 times in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot). The single opening of the big winning opening is determined by the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

When the ending effect after the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the time saving state over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Further, when V winning occurs during the big hit round, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) controlled to the time saving state.

Even in the probability variable state or the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 30, and the right-handed display section 55.例文帳に追加Therefore, after the first big win (also called first win) occurs, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion performance even in the time saving state after the big win round is finished.

In the time-saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the special figure) than the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the general figure) is executed to shorten the normal state, and furthermore, control is executed to improve the probability of becoming a "normal game hit" in the normal state than in the normal state. In addition, in the time-saving state, by increasing the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening, the frequency of game balls entering the second starting winning opening is increased and the second starting is performed. Electronic chew support control may be performed to facilitate entry into the winning slot (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time-saving state after the big hit round, the second special game is started by entering the launched game ball into the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display section 22 becomes a display mode showing a big win pattern, a big win (also referred to as a winning streak) occurs.

As the types of jackpots in the second special game, there are probability variable jackpots 5 to 9 as described above. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. It should be noted that the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 30, and the right-handed display section 55 continues from the time of the first hit.

During the round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). The single opening of the big winning opening is determined by the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state and a probability variable state (high probability high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) as in the first hit. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the big winning rounds in the consecutive wins, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 30, and the right-handed display section 55. - 特許庁For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player can hit the consecutive chances in the variable probability state or the time saving state after the end of the big winning round, Even in the state, it is always urged to hit to the right by the right hitting promotion effect.

After the first big hit round ends, the probability variable state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring Then, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low-probability-low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-handed display section 30, and right-handed display section 55 is finished. As a result, the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left area of the game area by hitting left again.

[Design of group notice effect]
Next, the design of the group notice effect at the development stage of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Group notice work process)
FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of the group announcement work process. As shown in FIG. 38, the group notice work process includes, in order of work, an outline creation process (step S901), an animation production process (step S902), a main video production process (step S903), and an authoring process. (step S904), sound creation process (step S905), lottery incorporation process (step S906), image incorporation process (step S907), sound incorporation process (step S908), lamp data It includes a creation step (step S909) and a lamp assembly step (step S910).

In step S901, in the process of creating an outline, an outline for newly designing a group notice in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is created.

In the animation production process of step S902, the animation storyboard used in the group notice is created, the characters and backgrounds used in the animation are designed, the V storyboard is created as a script for creating the animation, and the CG for the animation is created. Production and production of actual animation are performed.

In the main image production process of step S903, the animation created in the animation production process is used to create the image data used in the group announcement. The video data used in the group notice is created in this video production process, but the playback time of the created video data is longer than the execution time of the group notice actually executed in the pachinko game machine 1. made long. As a result, even if the execution time of the group announcement becomes longer due to the design change, the image data created in the present image production process can be used as it is without being changed. Further, in this video production process, the playback timing is designed for each video data so that the video data is played back at a predetermined timing for each performance. For example, in the variation pattern of main variation number 22, the animation of the group announcement is incorporated in the main video so that the group announcement is executed from the 985th frame for the stage A group announcement, and the group announcement for the stage B is the 1385th frame. An animation of the group notice is incorporated into the main video so that the group notice is executed from the In addition, in the variation pattern of main variation number 26, the animation of the group announcement is incorporated in the main video so that the group announcement is executed from the 1600th frame for the stage A group announcement, and the group announcement for the stage B is the 2000th frame. An animation of the group notice is incorporated into the main video so that the group notice is executed from the

In the authoring process of step S904, the video data created in the video production process is used to create video playback software (program) to be executed in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

In the sound creation process of step S905, various sound data such as BGM (background sound) and sound effects used in the group announcement are created in accordance with the video of the group announcement.

In step S906, in the process of incorporating the lottery, data on various lotteries related to the group announcement, such as the group announcement lottery, is created. In addition, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the group announcement and the like are designed in the step of incorporating this lottery. The created lottery data is incorporated in the pachinko game machine 1 as lottery software executed in the pachinko game 1. - 特許庁

In the image incorporation process of step S907, the image reproduction software created in the authoring process is incorporated into the pachinko machine 1 as the image reproduction software to be executed in the group announcement.

In the sound incorporation process of step S908, the sound data created in the sound creation process is incorporated into the pachinko game machine 1 as software for sound reproduction executed in the group announcement.

In the lamp data creation process of step S908, various lighting data such as lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of lighting means (light emitting means) such as lamps and LEDs used for group announcement is created.

In the lamp incorporation process of step S910, data such as lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of various lamps and LEDs created in the lamp data creation process are used as software for lamp reproduction executed in the pachinko game 1. It is incorporated in the gaming machine 1.

By going through the work in each of these steps, a lottery related to the group announcement effect, image data, sound data, and the like are created and installed as software to be executed in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

(This video production)
The main video production process for the group announcement will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 to 42 are diagrams for explaining an example of this video production process.

As shown in FIG. 39, first, in STEP 1, a character image to be used for group announcement is prepared. For example, Mumu-chan, the main character, is used in the group announcement, and four images g1 to g4 are prepared to express how Mumu-chan runs. Such character images are created in the animation production process.

Next, in STEP 2, using a moving image creation tool, a moving image of the character stepping is created using the four character images g1 to g4. For example, when the movie creation tool is activated, a timeline screen 710 is displayed. In the timeline screen 710, one or more layers are arranged along the vertical axis, and the horizontal axis is the time axis. Each layer is arranged in numerical order such as layer 1, 2, 3, and so on from the top. It is located. The number of layers and the width of the time axis can be set to values desired by the user.

In STEP 2, each character image g1 to g4 is arranged in a column of a predetermined layer. For example, in the example shown in (a), character images g1 to g4 are arranged on the timeline corresponding to layer 1, and constitute moving image data A1 to A4. According to the moving image data A1 to A4, the pattern of the stepping moving image is composed of the character images g1 to g4.

By repeatedly arranging the set of the stepping motion picture data A1 to A4 created as described above on the timeline, the motion picture of the character stepping is repeated. For example, in the example shown in (b), moving image data A1 to A4 are repeated for three cycles. Then, this stepping video data is output. In this manner, stepping animations are created for other characters by similar work.

As shown in FIG. 40, in STEP 3, a moving image in which the character progresses is created. First, the screen size of the image display device 5 is set to a predetermined size. For example, in the example shown in (a), the width of the X-axis along the horizontal direction on the screen is set to 800, and the width of the XY-axis along the vertical direction on the screen is set to 640. Note that the value corresponding to the center position is 0 on both the X-axis and the Y-axis. Therefore, the screen size is −400≦X≦400 and −320≦Y≦320.

By using the setting screen 730 of the moving image creation tool, it is possible to set the width by which the moving image data moves. For example, in the example shown in (b), one period of the stepping video data A1 to A4 of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is set to 500, and linear movement is performed on the X axis within the range of -1000 ≤ X ≤ 500. is set to

As shown in FIG. 41, in STEP 4, a moving image in which a plurality of characters progress is created. For example, in the example shown in (a), moving image data is created in a similar creation procedure in which a character named Jam-chan used for group announcement moves linearly on the X axis within the range of -1000≦X≦500.

As described above, when animation data is created for a plurality of characters that move linearly on the X-axis within the range of -1000≦X≦500, the animation data of each character is placed in different layers as shown in (b). Deploy. Also, by shifting the time axis between characters, it is possible to shift the timing at which they appear. Furthermore, by shifting the position of the Y-axis between characters, it is possible to shift the position on the Y-axis where the characters appear. The Z axis is the axis between the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen. A group announcement (Boingo group announcement in the present embodiment) can be designed so that the character moves between the characters.

As shown in FIG. 42, in STEP5, a moving image of the group announcement is finally created. For example, as shown in (a), by arranging moving image data of six types of characters A to F on the timeline of the layer, the moving image of the group announcement is completed.

Also, by changing the length of the moving image data on the timeline, the animation itself can change the moving speed of the character while maintaining the moving image in which the moving image of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three cycles. can be done. For example, the moving image data of the character C placed on the layer 10 is, like the moving image data of the character C placed on the layer 9, the moving image data in which the moving image of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three cycles. , the length of the animation data of the character C placed on the layer 10 on the timeline is shorter than the length of the animation data of the character C placed on the layer 9 on the timeline. As a result, character C placed on layer 10 keeps the same animation as character C placed on layer 9, but progresses on the screen at a faster speed than character C placed on layer 9. .

In the six-person group announcement, multiple characters are not arranged at the same timing and at the same speed at the coordinates arranged on the screen. For example, FIG.
), the moving image data of a plurality of characters are not arranged on the timeline at the same timing and for the same length.

Furthermore, as shown in (b), by arranging the moving image data of the cloud of sand in the layer 1 located on the rearmost side, it is possible to combine the moving image of the cloud of sand with the moving image in which a plurality of characters are progressing.

As described above, it is possible to create moving image data of a group announcement in which a plurality of characters advance. In the actual creation of the moving image data for the advance notice of the group, it is assumed that the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of a predetermined size (for example, 19 inches), and the game board 2 covers the screen. Moving image data for group announcement is created in a state in which an area corresponding to the position is masked. Furthermore, moving image data for the group announcement is created up to a region corresponding to the large size (eg, 20 inches) so that it can be applied to a size (eg, 20 inches) larger than the predetermined screen size (eg, 19 inches).

(Group notice work process)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an overview of a six-person group notice. As shown in FIG. 43, in the six-person group announcement included in the group announcement effect, an image is displayed in which six characters such as maids A to F progress in a group. The group announcement performance is not limited to six characters, but is a performance in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the performances that can be executed in the pachinko game machine 1 by the appearance of a plurality of characters. Since the maids A to F all wear the same or substantially the same maid clothes, it is difficult to distinguish the types of characters other than recognizing their faces. In this embodiment, the pattern of the apron worn by each character is different for each character, but it is difficult to recognize the difference at first glance. Maid A is Mumu-chan, who is the main character, and maid B is Jam-chan, who is the character with the next highest priority after Mumu-chan, who is the main character.

In the six-person group announcement, there are cases where the character image fits within the display area of the image display device 5, and part of the character image (for example, the face and legs) does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5 and protrudes. In some cases. For example, among the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 6 maids A (Muyume-chan) appear, and 5 of them are maids whose faces are visible. That is, the face of one of the six maids A who appear does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 . Among the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids B (Jam-chan) appear, of which 4 maids B have their faces visible. That is, the face of one of the five maids B who appear does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 . Among the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids C appear, and 3 maids C have their faces visible. That is, the faces of two of the five maids C that appear do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 . Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids D appear, and 3 maids D's faces are visible among them. That is, the faces of two of the five maids D that appear do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 . Among the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids E appear, and 3 maids E have their faces visible. That is, the faces of two of the five maids E that appear do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 . Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids F appear, and 3 maids F's faces are visible among them. In other words, the faces of two of the five maids F that appear do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 .

In this way, the plurality of characters displayed in the group announcement effect are divided into characters whose entire bodies are displayed within the display area of the screen, and characters whose whole bodies (for example, faces) are displayed without being displayed within the display area of the screen. A character whose whole body (for example, a part other than the face) fits within the display area of the screen and is displayed.

In addition, the plurality of characters displayed in the group notice effect are characters of low importance in the content of the pachinko machine 1, such as maids C to F, and maids A (Muyume-chan) and maid B (Jam-chan). , the maids C to F have a higher degree of importance than the maids C to F in the content of the pachinko machine 1, and the maids A and B have a fuller body than the maids C to F, and their faces do not fit within the display area of the screen. The rate at which parts other than the face are displayed within the display area of the screen is low. In other words, the six-person group notice is designed so that maid A and maid B are more likely to appear while showing their faces than maids C to F.

(Auxiliary display)
FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining the auxiliary display used in the group announcement effect. As shown in FIG. 44, in the group announcement effect, an auxiliary display is performed to emphasize that the characters are advancing. In the present embodiment, an image of sand smoke is displayed as an auxiliary display. By displaying an image of the dust cloud in the vicinity of the character, or more effectively following the advancing character, the player can be made to believe that the progress of the character is causing the dust cloud. , it is possible to emphasize the manner in which the character runs through. As shown in FIG. 42(b) described above, the image of the dust cloud, which is the auxiliary display, is arranged on the layer 1 located on the rearmost side. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 44, the image of the dust cloud is located on the back side of any character that appears.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44, since the layer on which the image of the maid E is arranged is located on the front side of the layer on which the image of the maid C is arranged, the image of the maid E is more visible than the image of the maid C. is also displayed on the front side. On the other hand, the image of the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E is located on the back side of both the image of the maid E and the image of the maid C.

In this way, when the display of the maid E and the display of the maid C overlap, the display of the maid E takes precedence over the display of the other maid C, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E When the display of the maid C overlaps, the display of the maid C takes precedence over the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E.

(motion blur processing)
FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining motion blur processing used in the group announcement effect. As shown in FIG. 45, in the group announcement effect, motion blur processing is applied to advancing characters. Motion blur processing is processing for displaying an afterimage of an object (for example, a character). By applying motion blur processing to the display of a progressing character, an afterimage of the character is left after the progressing character. will be displayed. As a result, it is possible to create a dynamic group announcement effect. In addition, when an image obtained by motion blur processing for one character overlaps an image obtained by motion blur processing for another character, the motion blur processing for the one character should be performed so as not to hinder the visibility of the other character. The image is transparent.

(Aspect of contours when characters overlap)
FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the state of outlines when characters overlap in the group announcement effect. As shown in FIG. 46, in the group announcement effect, one character may overtake another character. At this time, when the display of the overtaking character overlaps the display of the other character, the outline of the overtaking character is displayed thicker than the outlines of the other characters.

For example, in the example shown in (a), the maid B located on the front side of the maid A
In this case, the outline of maid B is thicker than that of maid A, and maid B is displayed more emphasized than maid A. Also, the maid A, which is positioned in front of the maid F, overtakes the maid F. It is displayed more emphatically than Maid F.

Furthermore, in the example shown in (b), the maid B positioned in front of the maid A overtakes the maid A. In this case, the contour of the maid B is higher than the contour of the maid A. It is thicker, and Maid B is emphasized more than Maid A. Also, the maid A, which is positioned in front of the maid D, overtakes the maid D. In this case, the outline of the maid A is thicker than the outline of the maid D, and the maid A Shown with more emphasis than Maid D.

When one character overtakes another character, it is not limited to thickening the contour of the one character, but rather enlarging the size of the one character or making the brightness of one character higher than the brightness of the other character. One character may be displayed more emphasized than other characters by increasing the contrast of one character or making the contrast of one character clearer than that of the other characters.

(Display on screen of image display device)
FIG. 47 is a view looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 during execution of the group announcement effect. As shown in FIGS. 44 to 46 described above, since the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 is covered with the game board 2, when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front, the screen of the image display device 5 is Of the end portions, the portion covered with the game board 2 is not visible. However, as shown in FIG. 47, if one looks between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be visually recognized.

Here, in FIG. 47, in the 6-person group announcement, as shown in (a), the main character, Maid A (Muyume-chan), is not displayed in its entirety yet, but part of the maid A (in this example, Then, from the first situation in which the face is displayed, as shown in (b), the initially displayed maid A is not entirely displayed yet, but the part of the maid A is displayed as the first face. Second, the maid B (Jam-chan), who was displayed more than the situation and was displayed second, is not fully displayed yet, but a part of the maid B (a part of the face in this example) is displayed. The situation is shown to be Also, the first displayed character (maid A) and the second displayed character (maid B) have different position coordinates on the Y-axis along the vertical direction on the screen.

Such a change from the first situation to the second situation occurs when the image display device 5 is viewed while the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and when the game board 2 and the image display are changed. This occurs regardless of whether the image display device 5 is viewed while looking into the space between the device 5 and the image display device 5 . In other words, FIG. 47 shows the case where the image display device 5 is viewed while looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, but as shown in FIG. 5, the main character, Maid A (Muyume-chan), is not fully displayed in the 6-person group notice, but part of the maid A (in this example part of the face) is displayed, the first displayed maid A is not entirely displayed yet, while a part of the maid A is displayed more than the first situation, and 2 A second situation occurs in which the second displayed maid B (Jam-chan) is not fully displayed yet, but a part of the maid B (a part of the face in this example) is displayed.

(Overall image of Bakuchu group notice)
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an overview of the Bakuchu group notice. As shown in FIG. 48, in the Bakuchu group announcement included in the group announcement effect, an image is displayed in which characters such as Bakuchu advance as a group.

In the explosive chew group notice, there are cases where the character image fits within the display area of the image display device 5, and part of the character image (for example, ears and legs) does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5 and protrudes. Sometimes there are.

In this way, in the Bakuchu group announcement, moving image data of the Bakuchu group announcement is created by arranging on the screen an animation image in which one type of character advances. The animation data for the Bakuchu group announcement is also created based on the work process shown in FIGS. 38 to 42 in the same manner as the animation data for the six-person group announcement.

(Volume change and brightness data table in group announcement effect)
FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining changes in sound volume and a luminance data table in the group announcement effect. As shown in FIG. 49, the group notice effect (6-person group notice, explosive chew notice, Boingo group notice) has a first display period (1000 msec), a second display period (1310 msec), and a third display period (830 msec). It is divided into

The first display period is a period from when the character display first starts in the group announcement effect to when the character display ends first. More specifically, the first display period is the period from when one of the characters first appears in the group announcement effect to when one of the characters first disappears. For example, if one character appears first in the group announcement effect, and the one character proceeds as it is at the top, the period until the one character disappears is the first display period. Alternatively, if one character appears first in the group announcement effect and is overtaken by another character, the period until the other character disappears from the edge of the screen becomes the first display period. . Note that, in the present embodiment, in the first display period, the display of the character displayed second ends before the display of the character displayed first ends. That is, in the first display period, the first character appears, the first character is overtaken by the second character, and the second character disappears first from the end of the screen.

The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which the display of a new character starts and ends. More specifically, in the second display period, after one of the characters disappears first in the group announcement effect, new characters appear one after another, and the last character continues to appear. It's the time it takes to appear. Note that the second display period is longer than each of the first display period and the third display period. Also, the number of characters appearing in the second display period is larger than that in each of the first display period and the third display period.

The third display period is a period during which the character display ends without the display of a new character starting. More specifically, the third display period is the period from the appearance of the last character in the group announcement effect to the disappearance of all the characters. Note that the character that disappears last is not limited to the character that appears last, and may be a character that is omitted by the character that appears last. Note that the third display period is longer than the first display period.

Regarding the change in volume in the group announcement effect, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group announcement effect at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the effect sound is produced during the first display period. The volume is increased to a specific volume, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is decreased during the third display period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 48, the effect sound corresponding to the group announcement effect has a minimum volume (for example, silence or minimum volume) at the beginning of the first display period, and then gradually increases in stages. A specified value is reached and then maintained at the specified value (eg, set volume or maximum volume). During the second display period, the volume remains at the specified value. After that, in the third display period, after the volume is maintained at the specified value, the volume gradually decreases step by step to the minimum.

It should be noted that the stepwise increase of the volume from the minimum to the specified value during the first display period is referred to as volume fade-in. Also, the gradual reduction of the volume from the specified value to the minimum in the third display period is referred to as volume fade-out. In the present embodiment, the fade-in time from when the sound effect is output in the first display period until the volume of the sound effect rises from the minimum to the specified value is the time when the volume of the sound effect decreases in the third display period. It is shorter than the fade-out time from the beginning until the volume of the effect sound becomes minimum.

The brightness data table is composed of a plurality of brightness data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means. A plurality of lighting means includes frame lamp 9 (frame left lamp 9L, frame right lamp 9R), function lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric lamp. It includes game effect lamps such as chew lamps 9H, stick controller lamps 9J, and trigger button lamps 9K. The luminance data table includes a first luminance data table corresponding to the first display period, a second luminance data table corresponding to the second display period, and a third luminance data table corresponding to the third display period. . That is, during the first display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 is lit, blinked, or extinguished based on the luminance data contained in the first luminance data table, and during the second display period, it is contained in the second luminance data table. A predetermined game effect lamp 9 is lit, blinked, or extinguished based on the luminance data contained in the third display period, and a predetermined game effect lamp 9 is lit, blinked, or extinguished based on the luminance data contained in the third luminance data table during the third display period. or turn off.

(Occurrence timing of 6-person group notice in stage A)
FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of the advance notice of the group of six in stage A. FIG. As described above, in stage A, the 6-person group announcement is executed from the 1600th frame during the previous change.

For example, as shown in FIG. 50, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 9 that loses in the first half of the SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), and the variation time of the subsequent variation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). The six-person group announcement starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous change. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 9, which is lost in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) at which the six-person group announcement is executed belongs to the latter half of the total variation time (2984 frames). That is, in the case of losing in the first half of the SP reach, the display result is suggested, and the predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is the lost display result ( 2984 frames), the first display period of the six-person group announcement starts in the second half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the variation pattern of variation number 20, which is a hit in the first half of the SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), and the variation time of the post variation is 93300 msec (2801 frames). 53280 msec of the previous fluctuation (
1600th frame). Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 20, which is a hit in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) at which the six-person group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). That is, in the case of winning in the first half of the SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a winning display result ( 4662 frames), the first display period of the six-person group announcement starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (1600th frame) at which the 6-person group notice is executed is the timing (2331st frame) close to the half of the total variation time (4662 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). second half).

In the case of the variation pattern of variation number 23, which is hit in the second half of the SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), and the variation time of the post variation is 99900 msec (3000 frames). It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous variation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 23, which is successful in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) at which the six-person group announcement is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). That is, in the latter half of the SP reach, in the case of a hit, it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( 4861 frames), the first display period of the six-person group announcement starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (1600th frame) at which the six-person group notice is executed is the timing close to half (approximately the 2430th frame) of the total variation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern of variation number 26, which is a hit in the final reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), and the variation time of the post variation is 142800 msec (4288 frames). Start from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 26, which is a hit in the final reach, the timing (1600th frame) at which the six-person group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). In other words, in the case of winning in the final reach, the display result is suggested, and the predetermined period (6149 frame), the first display period of the six-person group announcement starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (1600th frame) at which the six-person group notice is executed is the timing close to half (approximately the 3074th frame) of the total variation time (6149 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). (second half).

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the case of the fluctuation patterns of fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach and the final reach, the post fluctuation time is set longer, so after the variable display starts The first display period of the 6-person group announcement is not configured to start in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period until the variable display is suggested to be a failed display result. . However, even in the case of variation patterns of variation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the time from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a lost display result In the predetermined period, the first display period of the six-person group announcement may start in the first half of the predetermined period.

FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the generation timing of the explosive chew group notice in stage B. FIG. As described above, in stage B, the explosion group announcement is executed from the 2000th frame during the post-change.

For example, as shown in FIG. 51, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 9 that loses in the first half of the SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), and the variation time of the subsequent variation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). , and the explosive chew group notice starts from the 66600 msec (2000 frame) of the previous change. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 9, which is lost in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th frame) at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed belongs to the latter half of the total variation time (2984 frames). That is, in the case of losing in the first half of the SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period ( 2984 frames), the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice starts in the second half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the variation pattern of variation number 20, which is hit in the first half of the SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), and the variation time of the post variation is 93300 msec (2801 frames). , starting from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous variation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 20, which is successful in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th frame) at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). That is, in the first half of the SP reach, if it is a hit, it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a hit display result ( 4662 frames), the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (2000th frame) at which the explosive chew group notice is executed is the timing close to half (2331st frame) of the total variation time (4662 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern of variation number 23, which is hit in the second half of the SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), and the variation time of the post variation is 99900 msec (3000 frames). , starting from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous variation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 23, which is successful in the second half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th frame) at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). That is, in the latter half of the SP reach, in the case of a hit, it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( 4861 frames), the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (2000th frame) at which the explosion group notice is executed is close to half (approximately the 2430th frame) of the total variation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). Timing (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern of variation number 26, which is a hit in the second half of the final reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), and the variation time of the post variation is 142800 msec (4288 frames). , starting from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous variation. For this reason, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 26, which is a hit in the final reach, the timing (2000th frame) at which the explosive group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). In other words, in the case of winning in the final reach, the display result is suggested, and the predetermined period (6149 frame), the first display period of the explosive group notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (2000th frame) at which the explosive chew group notice is executed is close to half (approximately 3074th frame) of the total variation time (6149 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). Timing (second half).

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the case of the fluctuation patterns of fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach and the final reach, the post fluctuation time is set longer, so after the variable display starts In the predetermined period until the variable display is suggested to be a false display result, the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. do not have. However, even in the case of variation patterns of variation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the time from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a lost display result It may be configured such that the first display period of the explosive chew group notice within the predetermined period starts in the predetermined period.

[Brightness data]
Luminance data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 controls various lighting means in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 76. FIG. These brightness data tables are stored in the ROM 121 . For example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the lighting (emission) locations of the game effect lamps according to the display in the group announcement based on the luminance data stored in the luminance data table. In the present embodiment, the lighting location literally refers to a location that is lit. A location where a lamp that is not lit (that is, a lamp that is extinguished) is not called a lit location. In another example, the lighting location refers to a location that is lit with high brightness. A location may be called a location, but a location where a lamp that is lit with a luminance lower than that of a lamp located at the lighting location is not called a lighting location.

More specifically, data (also referred to as elements) for turning on or off a lamp is defined by a luminance data table. If data of 0 (for example, data of "000" corresponding to RGB) is stored, the particular lamp is extinguished. If there is no storage area for data referenced by a specific lamp in the luminance data table, or if the luminance data table itself does not exist, the specific lamp is turned off. On the other hand, there is a luminance data table referenced by a specific lamp, and one or more data (for example, "100", "010", "001" corresponding to RGB) exist in the data storage area referenced by the specific lamp. If is stored, the specific lamp lights up.For example, when a specific effect such as a big hit announcement effect is executed during the effect corresponding to the normal background, the specific effect is referred to Even if the brightness data table does not specify data for a specific lamp, if the data for a specific lamp is specified in the brightness data table referred to in the production corresponding to the normal background, the specific lamp is lit. will do.

(Parent table in group notice luminance data table)
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the group announcement luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 52, the parent table in the group notice luminance data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each effect time of the group announcement effect is defined.

For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 3140 msec so as to match the group announcement effect.

(Child table in group notice luminance data table)
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group announcement luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 53, in the child table of the group notice luminance data table, the group notice performance time is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamps 9, and a grandchild table (luminance data table) is referenced in each time zone. ) is specified.

For example, in the first display period (the period of the effects shown in FIGS. 85 to 86 and FIGS. 141 to 143 to be described later) of the period in which the group announcement effect is executed, W1 is used for the frame lamp and W1 is used for the character object lamp 9A. A grandchild table is provided for Y1, L1 for the board left lamp 9B, U1 for the board top lamp 9C, and A1 for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables used in the first display period correspond to the first luminance data table shown in FIG.

In the second display period (period of effects shown in FIGS. 87, 88, 144, and 145 to be described later) of the period in which the group announcement effect is executed, W2 is displayed for the frame lamp, Y2 is displayed for the character object lamp 9A, A grandchild table of L2 is provided for the board left lamp 9B, U2 is provided for the board top lamp 9C, and A2 is provided for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables used in the second display period correspond to the second luminance data table shown in FIG.

In the third display period (period of effects shown in FIGS. 89, 90, 146, and 147 to be described later) of the period during which the group notice effect is executed, W3 is displayed for the frame lamp, Y3 for the character object lamp 9A, A grandchild table of L3 is provided for the board left lamp 9B, U3 is provided for the board top lamp 9C, and A3 is provided for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables used in the third display period correspond to the third luminance data table shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 53, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the group announcement effect, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the role Six types of luminance data tables are provided for object lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board top lamp 9C, and attacker lamp.

Note that the V lamp 9G is located at a position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group forewarning effect (for example, in the vicinity of the character's appearance in the group forewarning effect), but since it is not used in the group foretelling effect, its grandchild table are not provided. Since the V lamp 9G is a lamp for notifying that the round is in a jackpot game state in which a V prize can occur, that a V prize has occurred, or that a big win has occurred, the V lamp 9G is a lamp for notifying that a big win has occurred. This is because if it lights up, the player will mistakenly think that he or she has won a V prize or won a big hit. not Note that the V lamp 9G may be provided at another position such as the vicinity of the board left lamp 9B as a position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group forewarning effect. should not be used in

Also, the stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A and the trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B are positioned in relation to the direction in which the character advances in the ), but since it is not used in the group announcement effect, its grandchild table is not prepared. The stick controller lamp 9J lights up to prompt the user to pull the stick controller 31A in an operation effect (shown in FIG. 122 (c91) described later) and the like, and the trigger button lamp 9K lights for a PUSH effect (shown in FIG. 83 (described later)). a19), etc.), the lamp lights up to prompt the operation of pressing the push button 31B, so if it lights up in the group announcement effect, the player can operate the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In order to avoid such an inconvenience, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are not used in the group announcement effect. Note that the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K may be provided at other positions such as near the board left lamp 9B as positions related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group announcement effect, but this is not the case. However, it may be so arranged that it is not used in the group announcement effect.

The features of the grandchild tables W1 to W3 used for the grandchild tables in the group announcement effect are summarized below. Specifically, the number of high-brightness lighting locations is greater in W2 than in W1. Regarding the switching interval, W1 performs lighting control at equal intervals of 100 msec, whereas W2 performs lighting control at irregular intervals of 50 to 80 msec, which is shorter than W1, and W3 performs lighting control at 10 msec for the frame left lamp 9L. , lighting control is performed at short intervals, whereas the lighting control is performed at long intervals of 80 msec for the frame right lamp 9R.

Regarding the lighting pattern, the luminance data for W1 is defined so that the lighting locations are moved in accordance with the advancing direction of the advance notice of the group and the lighting is performed with high luminance. For W3, the luminance data is defined so that both the left frame lamp 9L and the right frame lamp 9R are turned off or turned on at low luminance according to the advancing direction of the advance notice of the group. there is Regarding the first luminance data, W1 is defined to turn off all the lamps or light them with low luminance, while W2 and W3 are defined to turn on predetermined lighting locations with high luminance. Luminance data is specified. On the other hand, as for the last luminance data, W3 is defined so that all the lamps of both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are turned off or turned on with low luminance.

Regarding the luminance data loop, W1 and W3 are not defined to repeatedly use the same luminance data, whereas W2 is defined to repeatedly use the same luminance data. Regarding luminance data for 10 minutes for troubleshooting, W1 and W3 are defined, but W2 is not defined.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group notice luminance data table)
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the group announcement luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) in this example), and the data is "0" to "F , the luminance is expressed in hexadecimal. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting. When turning off is included as the concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), in the grandchild table W1 used in the first display period, RGB data are defined for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec. Furthermore, at the last time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data for troubleshooting is specified. In W1, first luminance data obtained by combining data for turning off or lighting each lamp included in the frame lamps with low luminance and data for lighting each lamp with high luminance for each hour; A combination of data for extinguishing or lighting each lamp with low luminance and data for lighting each lamp with high luminance is composed of second luminance data different from the first luminance data. For example, if a set of lamp data corresponding to T1-2 is used as first luminance data, a set of lamp data corresponding to T1-3 can be used as second luminance data. Predetermined brightness data are defined for other times as well.

In W1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low luminance is defined for "R" for all the lamps included in the frame lamps, and "G" and " B” is defined to be “0” indicating that it is turned off. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 84(a22) and 141(b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, all the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or turned on with low luminance. become. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group announcement effect will be executed from now on. In the present embodiment, in order to make the effects more effective by lighting the lamps mainly in red, "1" indicating low luminance is defined as "R", and "G" and "B" are defined. is defined as "0" indicating that the lamp is turned off. For example, when each lamp is mainly lit in green, "1" is defined as indicating low luminance in "G", and "R" and "B" are defined. "0" indicating that the lamp is turned off may be defined in "B", and "1" indicating low luminance is defined in "B", and "R" and "G" are turned off. "0" indicating is defined.

Also, in W1, as indicated by the dotted arrow, from T1-2 to T1-10, the lamps that light up with high brightness from the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 to the frame left lamps are at equal intervals of 100 msec. Luminance data is defined to move by . Here, the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 corresponds to the place where the character appears in the advance notice of the group, and the brightness data is such that the place where the lamp lights up with high brightness moves in accordance with the direction in which the character advances. stipulated. The lamp on the left side of the frame is initially turned off or lit with low brightness, and gradually increases in intensity as the part of the lamp that lights up with high brightness moves in accordance with the direction in which the character is moving. Luminance data is defined so as to light with luminance. On the other hand, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8, which were initially lit with high brightness, are extinguished or lit with low brightness as the lamps lit with high brightness move in accordance with the direction in which the character advances. Luminance data is defined in . As a result, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 86 and FIGS. 141 to 143, which will be described later, the frame lamps are also displayed from the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effects in which the character appears from the right end of the screen in the group announcement. It comes to change the position where it lights up with high brightness toward the left side.

W1 includes data for lighting one frame lamp with high luminance and turning off other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp. Data are specified. As a result, in W1, it is possible to move the position of the lamp that lights up with high brightness in accordance with the direction in which the character advances.

In addition, in W1, luminance data for defect countermeasures are defined in the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During this 10-minute period, the frame lamps are sparsely brightened in accordance with the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period so that the lighting mode of the frame lamps does not feel strange when the next display period shifts to the second display period. Luminance data is defined so that it lights up at

Here, if this 10-minute data is not provided, if lighting control is performed using W1 and W2 is not entered due to some abnormality, lamp lighting control is performed again from T1-1. However, as indicated by the dotted line arrows, from T1-2 to T1-10, again from the vicinity of the frame right ramp 9R5 to 9R8, high The position of the lamp that lights up with the brightness shifts, giving the player a sense of discomfort. However, in the present embodiment, since data for 10 minutes is provided in T1-11, even if the lighting control is performed using W1 and does not shift to W2 due to some abnormality, in 10 minutes , the frame lamp can be lit in a light emission mode suitable for the grandchild table W2, so that a feeling of strangeness can be prevented. Then, if the abnormality is resolved during the 10 minutes, the player can continue playing the game without a sense of incongruity.

In W1, since the above-described 10-minute defect countermeasure luminance data is defined, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. .

In addition, the luminance data for 10 minutes of trouble countermeasures specified in W1 is luminance data for regularly lighting adjacent frame lamps in order so that the lighting position is shifted from the previous state of T1-10. be.

As shown in FIG. 54(b), in the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period, RGB data are displayed for each lamp over T2-1 to T2-10 at irregular intervals of 50 to 80 msec. stipulated. In W2, first luminance data obtained by combining data for turning off or turning on each lamp included in the frame lamps with low luminance and data for turning on each lamp with high luminance for each time; A combination of data for extinguishing or lighting each lamp with low luminance and data for lighting each lamp with high luminance is composed of second luminance data different from the first luminance data. For example, if a set of lamp data corresponding to T2-2 is set as first luminance data, a set of lamp data corresponding to T2-3 can be set as second luminance data. Predetermined brightness data are defined for other times as well.

W2 includes luminance data for causing one frame lamp to light up with high luminance and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp to light up at high luminance, and lamps that sparsely (randomly) light up with high luminance. The luminance data is defined so that For example, in W2, high luminance data (for example, "A") are sparsely defined so that a plurality of locations are lit with high luminance. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 87, 88, 144, and 145, which will be described later, during the second display period of the group foretelling effect, the frame lamps are displayed in accordance with the manner in which the characters advance in groups in the group foretelling effect. will sparsely illuminate with high brightness. W2 is designed to light more frame lamps with higher luminance than W1.

Since W2 is not provided with luminance data for countermeasures as in W1, lighting control is performed by repeatedly using luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10. Here, if the lighting control was performed using W2, and the transition to W3 was not performed due to some abnormality, even if the lamp lighting control was performed again from T2-1, the frame lamps would be sparsely high. Since the mode of lighting with brightness is merely repeated, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Also, unlike W2, it is possible to provide all of the data that is referred to every time over the entire time period without repeating the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10. Or, it takes time to confirm that the created data is correct, which makes it very inefficient. On the other hand, like W2 in the present embodiment, lighting control is performed by repeatedly using luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10, so that only one set of data that is repeatedly referred to can be created. You can improve your time efficiency. The reason why the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using one set of data in the second display period of the group announcement effect is that the second display period of the group announcement effect is longer than the first display period and the third display period. Since the second display period is long and in the group notice effect, the screen is filled with a plurality of characters, and the plurality of characters proceed in a group, so the lighting corresponding to such a effect is performed. This is because it suffices to repeat lighting in the same manner.

As shown in FIG. 54(c), in the grandchild table W3 used in the third display period, RG is applied to the frame left lamp and the frame right lamp over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec.
B data is specified. After that, for the left lamp of the frame, RGB data is specified over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec, and for the right lamp of the frame, it is continued over T3-7 to T3-38 at long intervals of 80 msec. RGB data is defined.

In addition, in W3, as indicated by the dotted arrow, from T3-2 to T3-30, the lamps that had been lit with high luminance from the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 are gradually extinguished or lowered in stages. Increase the number of lamps that are turned off or turned on at low luminance so that they are turned on at high luminance. Further, for T3-7 to T3-38, luminance data is specified at intervals of 80 msec in the case of the right frame lamps 9R2 to 9R12, whereas the left frame lamp 9L5 positioned in the direction in which the character advances in the advance notice of the group. 9L12, the luminance data is defined so that the luminance changes from high luminance to off or low luminance at short intervals of 10 msec. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 89, 90, 146, and 147, which will be described later, the frame lamps are moved from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effects in which the character disappears to the left end of the screen in the group announcement. It will change the position to turn off or turn on with low luminance.

Further, in W3, luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or turned on with low luminance at the time of transition from T3 to T30. Further, in W3, similarly to W1, luminance data for defect countermeasures are defined in the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During this 10-minute period, luminance data is defined so that the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at a low luminance so as not to make the frame lamp look uncomfortable when the next performance is started.

In W3, since the luminance data for countermeasures for 10 minutes as described above is defined, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Grandchild table for accessory lamps in group notice luminance data table)
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the group notice luminance data table. As described above, the role lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the role lamps 9A1 to 9A4. In the luminance data table shown in FIG. 55, " RRRR”. Note that each of the character object lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the luminance is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting. When turning off is included as the concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance. A monochromatic LED emits light with a stronger spectrum because there are fewer filters that block light than a full-color LED. For this reason, a monochromatic LED has smaller luminance data corresponding to high luminance than a full-color LED.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), in the grandchild table Y1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec. At the last time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In Y1, "1" indicating low luminance is defined for all the lamps included in the character lamp 9A in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 84(a22) and 141(b43) which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, all the lamps included in the character lamp 9A are extinguished or at low luminance. Lights up. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group announcement effect will be executed from now on.

In addition, in Y1, luminance data for defect countermeasures are defined in the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During this 10-minute period, the character lamp 9A is turned on in accordance with the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period so that the lighting mode of the character lamp 9A does not cause a sense of incongruity when the transition to the second display period follows. Luminance data is defined so that the light is sparsely lit with high luminance.

In Y1, since the above-mentioned 10-minute defect countermeasure luminance data is defined, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period, each lamp of the character object lamp 9A is displayed at irregular intervals of 50 to 80 msec over T2-1 to T2-10. The luminance data is specified in

Y2 includes luminance data for lighting one lamp with high luminance and also lighting other lamps adjacent to the one lamp with high luminance, and the lamps that light with high luminance sparsely (randomly) change. The luminance data is specified as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 87, 88, 144, and 145, which will be described later, during the second display period of the group forewarning effect, the role object is displayed in accordance with the manner in which the characters progress in a group in the group foretelling effect. The lamps 9A are sparsely lit with high brightness.

Since Y2 is not provided with luminance data for countermeasures as in Y1, lighting control is performed by repeatedly using luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 55(c), in the grandchild table Y3 used in the third display period, luminance data are defined for the role lamp 9A over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. . After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in Y3, similarly to Y1, luminance data for defect countermeasures are defined in the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During this 10-minute period, the brightness data is defined so that the role lamp 9A is lit at a low brightness so that the lighting mode of the role lamp 9A does not feel strange when the next performance is started.

In Y3, since the above-described 10-minute defect countermeasure luminance data is defined, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Grand table for left panel lamp in group notice luminance data table)
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining an example of a left-board lamp grandchild table in the group notice luminance data table. As described above, the board left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5, and in the luminance data table shown in FIG. WWWW". Each of the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the luminance is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting. In addition, when turning off is included as a concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance. In addition, in the case of the accessory lamp 9A described above, the LED is only red, but even if the LED is only white like the board left lamp 9B, the maximum value representing high luminance is set to "6". ing.

As shown in FIG. 56(a), in the grandchild table L1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec. At the last time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In L1, "1" indicating low luminance is defined for all lamps included in the panel left lamp 9B in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 84(a22) and 141(b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, all the lamps included in the board left lamp 9B are extinguished or at low brightness. Lights up. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group announcement effect will be executed from now on.

In addition, in L1, luminance data for defect countermeasures are defined in the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During this 10-minute period, the left board lamp 9B is turned on in accordance with the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period so that the lighting state of the left board lamp 9B will not cause a sense of incongruity when the next second display period is started. Luminance data is defined so that the light is sparsely lit with high luminance.

In L1, since the above-described 10-minute defect countermeasure luminance data is defined, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 56(b), in the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period, each lamp of the board left lamp 9B is displayed at irregular intervals of 50 to 80 msec over T2-1 to T2-10. The luminance data is specified in

L2 includes luminance data for lighting one lamp with high luminance and also lighting other lamps adjacent to the lamp with high luminance, and the lamps that light with high luminance sparsely (randomly) change. The luminance data is specified as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 87, 88, 144, and 145, which will be described later, during the second display period of the group forewarning effect, the left side of the board is displayed in accordance with how the characters progress in a group in the group forecasting effect. The lamps 9B are sparsely lit with high brightness.

Unlike L1, L2 is not provided with luminance data for countermeasures against defects, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 56(c), in the grandchild table L3 used in the third display period, luminance data are defined for the board left lamp 9B over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. . After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in L3, similarly to L1, luminance data for countermeasures against defects is defined in the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. this one
In 0 minutes, the luminance data is defined so that the left board lamp 9B is lit at a low luminance so that the left board lamp 9B does not feel uncomfortable when the next performance is started.

In L3, since the above-described 10-minute defect countermeasure luminance data is defined, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Grand table for on-board lamps in the group notice luminance data table)
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the group notice luminance data table. As described above, the board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the board lamps 9C1 to 9C13, and each of the board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 has a plurality of colors (in this example, red ( R), green (G), and blue (B)), and as data, luminance is represented by hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting. When turning off is included as the concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance. On the other hand, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the luminance is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting. When turning off is included as the concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance. Thus, the high brightness values used with multi-color LEDs are greater than the high brightness values used with single color LEDs. In the case of the accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if the LED is only white like the on-board lamp 9C, the maximum value representing high luminance is set to "6". ing.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), in the grandchild table U1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at regular intervals of 100 msec. At the last time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In U1, "1" or "0" indicating low luminance is defined for all lamps included in the character lamp 9A in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 84(a22) and 141(b43) which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, all the lamps included in the board lamp 9C are extinguished or at low luminance. Lights up. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group announcement effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in U1, luminance data for countermeasures against defects is defined in the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During this 10-minute period, the board lamp 9C is turned on in accordance with the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period so as not to make the board lamp 9C feel uncomfortable when the next second display period is started. Luminance data is defined so that the light is sparsely lit with high luminance.

In U1, since the above-described 10-minute defect countermeasure luminance data is defined, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 57(b), in the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period, 5
Luminance data is defined for each lamp of the on-board lamp 9C over T2-1 to T2-10 at irregular intervals of 0 to 80 msec.

U2 includes luminance data for lighting one lamp with high luminance and also lighting other lamps adjacent to the one lamp with high luminance, and the lamps that light with high luminance sparsely (randomly) change. The luminance data is specified as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 87, 88, 144, and 145, which will be described later, during the second display period of the group forewarning effect, characters are displayed on the board in accordance with how the characters advance in groups in the group foretelling effect. The lamps 9C are sparsely lit with high brightness.

Unlike U1, U2 is not provided with luminance data for dealing with defects, so that lighting control is performed by repeatedly using luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 57(c), in the grandchild table U3 used in the third display period, luminance data are defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. . After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in U3, similarly to U1, luminance data for countermeasures against defects is defined in the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During this 10 minutes, luminance data is defined so that the board lamp 9C is extinguished or lit with low luminance so as not to make the board lamp 9C feel uncomfortable when shifting to the next performance.

In U3, since the luminance data for countermeasures for 10 minutes as described above is defined, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T3-1 to T3-38. .

In any of U1, U2, and U3, only "0" data is defined for the monochromatic on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8. That is, the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are not used in the group announcement effect.

(A grandchild table for the attack lamp in the group notice luminance data table)
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the group notice luminance data table. Each of the attack lamp 9E and the electric tube lamp 9H is an LED of multiple colors (three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) in this example), and the data is "0" to The "F" hexadecimal number represents luminance. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting. When turning off is included as the concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance. On the other hand, the V-attacker lamp 9F is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the luminance is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting. When turning off is included as the concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance. Thus, the high brightness values used with multi-color LEDs are greater than the high brightness values used with single color LEDs. In the case of the accessory lamp 9A described above, only red LEDs are used, but even if only white LEDs such as the V-attacker lamp 9F are used, the maximum value representing high luminance is set to "6". ing.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), in the grandchild table A1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec. At the last time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

A1 defines "1" or "0" indicating low luminance for all lamps in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 84(a22) and 141(b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric tuning lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are extinguished. Or it comes to light at low brightness. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group announcement effect will be executed from now on.

In addition, in A1, luminance data for defect countermeasures are defined in the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During this 10-minute period, the lamps are sparsely brightened in accordance with the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period so that there is no sense of incongruity in the lighting mode of each lamp when the transition to the next second display period occurs. Luminance data is defined so that it lights up at

In A1, since the above-described 10-minute defect countermeasure luminance data is defined, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 58(b), in the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T2-1 to T2-10 at irregular intervals of 50 to 80 msec. It is

A2 includes luminance data for lighting one lamp with high luminance and lighting other lamps adjacent to the lamp with high luminance, and the lamps that light with high luminance sparsely (randomly) change. The luminance data is specified as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 87, 88, 144, and 145, which will be described later, during the second display period of the group foretelling effect, the attacker ramps are displayed in accordance with the manner in which the characters advance in groups in the group foretelling effect. 9E, Electric Chu Lamp 9H, and V Attacker Lamp 9F will sparsely light up with high brightness.

Unlike A1, A2 does not have luminance data for countermeasures against defects, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 58(c), the grandchild table A3 used in the third display period defines luminance data for each lamp over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in A3, similarly to A1, luminance data for countermeasures against defects is defined in the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During this 10-minute period, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric tuning lamp 9H, and the V-attacker lamp 9E, the electric tuning lamp 9H, and the V-attacker lamp 9F are adjusted so as not to cause a sense of incongruity with respect to the lighting modes of the attacking lamp 9E, the electric tuning lamp 9H, and the V-attacker lamp 9F when the next performance is started. Luminance data is defined so that the lamp 9F is turned off or lit with low luminance.

In A3, since the above-described 10-minute defect countermeasure luminance data is defined, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Parent table in reach line luminance data table)
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the reach line luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 59, the parent table in the reach line luminance data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9, the production time of each reach line production is defined.

The reach line effect is different from the group notice effect, and it is a effect that foretells that the display result of the variable display by special symbols and decorative patterns will be the display result that the big hit pattern will stop, and it is a game that reaches the reach. It is a production that suggests (or informs) the person. In the reach line production, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 82 and FIGS. 129 to 132, which will be described later, a streak of light (also referred to as a reach line) appears from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5 along with flashes of light. , The reach line spreads while expanding and shrinking inward and outward (left and right direction) so as to connect the left and right decorative patterns constituting the reach, and then the reach line disappears.

In the parent table of the reach line luminance data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 1500 msec so as to match the reach line effect.

(child table in reach line data table)
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the reach line luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 60, in the child table of the reach line brightness data table, for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, the reach line performance time is subdivided, and a grandchild table (brightness data table) is referenced in each time period. ) is specified.

For example, during the period during which the reach line effect is executed, during the period during which the flash occurs (the effect period shown in FIGS. 79(a8), (a9) and FIGS. 129(a8), (a9) described later), Grandchild tables are provided for W11 for lamps, Y11 for character lamps 9A, L11 for board left lamps 9B, U11 for board top lamps 9C, and A11 for attacker lamps 9E.

During the period during which the reach line effect is generated (period of effect shown in FIG. 80 and FIG. 130 to be described later), W12 for the frame lamp, Y12 for the character lamp 9A, and the left board lamp. A grandchild table of L12 is provided for each of 9B. In addition, since the on-board lamp 9C and the attacker lamp 9E are not used during the period when the reach line is generated, the grandchild table is not prepared.

Of the period in which the reach line effect is executed, the period in which the reach line expands while expanding and contracting inward and outward (shown in FIGS. 81 (a13) to 82 (b17) and FIGS. 131 (a13) to 132 (b17) During the performance period), grandchild tables are provided for W13 for the frame lamp, Y13 for the character lamp 9A, L13 for the board left lamp 9B, U13 for the board lamp 9C, and A13 for the attacker lamp 9E.

During the period during which the reach line effect is executed, during which the reach line disappears (the effect period shown in FIGS. 82(a18) and 132(b18) described later), the frame lamp is W14, and the character lamp 9A is Y14. , L14 for the board left lamp 9B, U14 for the board top lamp 9C, and A14 for the attacker lamp 9E.

As shown in FIG. 60, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the reach line production, the left side of the frame is observed during the flashing period, the reach line expanding while expanding and shrinking in and out, and the reach line disappearing period. Six types of luminance data tables are provided for lamp 9L, frame right lamp 9R, accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board top lamp 9C, and attacker lamp. On the other hand, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the reach line production, the brightness data table referred to during the period in which the reach line occurs includes the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the character lamp 9A, and the board left lamp 9B. are provided.

In this way, in the reach line effect, the luminance data table is provided for the same number of lamps as the group forewarning effect or for a smaller number of lamps than the group forewarning effect.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in reach line luminance data table)
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the reach line luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) in this example), and the data is "0" to "F , the luminance is expressed in hexadecimal. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting. When turning off is included as the concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance.

As shown in FIG. 61(a), in the grandchild table W11, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted. Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. The reach line production is a production that suggests to the player that the ready-to-win situation has occurred, and is not a production that arouses the player's expectation by suggesting a big win like the group announcement production. For this reason, the reach line effect is different from the group notice effect, in which different luminance data are provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, and elaborate lighting control is performed to individually control each lamp. Common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, and the respective lamps are controlled together. Furthermore, since the reach line effect has a shorter execution time than the group forewarning effect, it is elaborated such that different brightness data are provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L as in the group forewarning effect, and each lamp is individually controlled. Instead of performing lighting control, common luminance data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, and each lamp is controlled together.

In W11, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in later-described FIGS. 79(a8) and 129(b8), the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamps are lit with high luminance at the timing of flashing. .

As shown in FIG. 61(b), in the grandchild table W12, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted. Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W12, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 130 to be described later, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high luminance while the reach line is generated. Luminance data is defined so that it lights up at

As shown in FIG. 61(c), in the grandchild table W13, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted. Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W13, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 131 to be described later, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high luminance while the reach line is generated. Luminance data is defined so that it lights up at

As shown in FIG. 61(d), in the grandchild table W14, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted. Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W14, brightness data is defined for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), but its value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIGS. 82(a18) and 132(b18), which will be described later, the frame lamps are also extinguished when the reach lines disappear.

(Grandchild table for accessory lamp in reach line luminance data table)
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the reach line luminance data table. Note that each of the character object lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting. When turning off is included as the concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), the grandchild table Y11 defines luminance data for the role lamp 9A over T11-1 and T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in later-described FIGS. 79(a8) and 129(b8), the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the role lamp 9A are lit with high brightness at the timing when the flash occurs. ing.

As shown in FIG. 62(b), the grandchild table Y12 defines luminance data for the role lamp 9A over T12-1 and T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. especially,
As shown in FIGS. 80 and 130, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the character product lamp 9A are lit with high brightness while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 62(c), the grandchild table Y13 defines luminance data for the character object lamp 9A over T13-1 to T13-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in later-described FIGS. 81 and 131, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the role lamp 9A are lit with high luminance while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 62(d), in the grandchild table Y14, luminance data is defined for the role lamp 9A over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIGS. 82(a18) and 132(b18), which will be described later, the accessory lamp 9A is also turned off as the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for left-board lamp in reach line luminance data table)
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining an example of a left-board lamp grandchild table in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the luminance is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting. In addition, when turning off is included as a concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance.

As shown in FIG. 63(a), the grandchild table L11 defines luminance data for the board left lamp 9B over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 79(a8) and 129(b8), which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the board left lamp 9B are lit with high luminance at the timing when the flash occurs. ing.

As shown in FIG. 63(b), the grandchild table L12 defines luminance data for the board left lamp 9B over T12-1 and T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 130, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the board left lamp 9B are lit with high brightness while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 63(c), the grandchild table L13 defines luminance data for the board left lamp 9B over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 131, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the board left lamp 9B are lit with high brightness while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 63(d), the grandchild table L14 defines luminance data for the board left lamp 9B over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIGS. 82(a18) and 132(b18), which will be described later, the board left lamp 9B is also extinguished when the reach line disappears.

(Grand table for on-board lamps in the reach line luminance data table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED of multiple colors (three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) in this example), and the data is as follows. The brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the luminance is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting. In addition, when turning off is included as a concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance.

As shown in FIG. 64(a), the grandchild table U11 defines luminance data for the on-board lamp 9C over T11-1 and T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 79(a8) and 129(b8) to be described later, at the timing when the flash occurs, among the lamps included in the board lamp 9C, the lamps other than the central board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are Luminance data is defined so as to light with high luminance.

As shown in FIG. 64(b), the grandchild table U13 defines luminance data for the on-board lamp 9C over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in later-described FIGS. 81 and 131, while the reach line is generated, among the lamps included in the board lamp 9C, the lamps other than the central board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are lit with high luminance. The luminance data is specified as follows.

As shown in FIG. 64(d), the grandchild table L14 defines luminance data for the on-board lamp 9C over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIGS. 82(a18) and 132(b18), which will be described later, the on-board lamp 9C is also turned off as the reach line disappears.

(Attacker lamp grandchild table in the reach line luminance data table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining an example of the attacker lamp grandchild table in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the attack lamp 9E and the electric tube lamp 9H is an LED of multiple colors (three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) in this example), and the data is "0 ” to “F” represent the brightness. Also, the V-attacker lamp 9F is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the luminance is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting. When turning off is included as the concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), the grandchild table A11 defines luminance data for each lamp over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in later-described FIGS. 79(a8) and 129(b8), at the timing of flashing, the brightness is adjusted so that the attack lamp 9E, the electric chute lamp 9H, and the V attack lamp 9F are lit with high luminance. Data are specified.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), the grandchild table A13 defines luminance data for each lamp over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 131, which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chute lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are lit with high luminance while the reach line is generated. there is

As shown in FIG. 65(d), the grandchild table A14 defines luminance data for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIGS. 82(a18) and 132(b18), which will be described later, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric tuning lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are also extinguished as the reach line disappears.

(Parent table in background notice luminance data table)
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the background notice luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 66, the parent table in the background notice luminance data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), character object lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, the effect time of each background notice effect is defined.

Unlike the group notice effect, the background notice effect is a effect that foretells that the display result of the variable display due to the special pattern or decorative pattern will be the display result that the big hit pattern will stop. chan) is displayed with a specific background (for example, a background of a starry sky).

In the parent table of the background notice luminance data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 5500 msec so as to match the background notice effect.

(child table in the background notice luminance data table)
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background notice luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 67, in the child table of the background notice luminance data table, for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, the background notice effect time is subdivided, and a grandchild table (luminance data table) referenced in each time period is used. ) is specified.

For example, in the first 2000 msec of the period in which the background notice effect is executed, W21 for the frame lamp, Y21 for the character lamp 9A, L21 for the board left lamp 9B, U21 for the board lamp 9C, and the attacker lamp 9E. Grandchild tables of A21 are provided respectively.

In the middle 100 msec of the period in which the background notice effect is executed, W22 for the frame lamp, Y22 for the character lamp 9A, L22 for the board left lamp 9B, U22 for the board lamp 9C, and A22 for the attacker lamp 9E. A grandchild table is provided for each.

In the last 600000 msec of the period in which the background notice effect is executed, W23 for the frame lamp, Y23 for the character lamp 9A, L23 for the board left lamp 9B, U23 for the board lamp 9C, and A23 for the attacker lamp 9E. A grandchild table is provided for each.

As shown in FIG. 67, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the background notice effect, the left frame lamp 9L, the right frame lamp 9R, and the character lamp 9A are displayed in all of the first 200 msec, the middle 100 msec, and the last 600000 msec. , board left lamp 9B, board top lamp 9C, and attacker lamp.

Thus, in the background announcement effect, the brightness data table is provided for the same number of lamps as in the group announcement effect.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in background notice luminance data table)
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the background notice luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) in this example), and the data is "0" to "F "
, the luminance is expressed in hexadecimal. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting. In addition, when turning off is included as a concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), in the grandchild table W21, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted. Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W21, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 68(b), in the grandchild table W22, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted. Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W22, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 68(c), in the grandchild table W23, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted. Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W23, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for accessory lamps in the background notice luminance data table)
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the background notice luminance data table. Note that each of the character object lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting. When turning off is included as the concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance.

As shown in FIG. 69(a), the grandchild table Y21 defines luminance data for the role lamp 9A over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 69(b), the grandchild table Y22 defines luminance data for the character lamp 9A over T22-1 and T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 69(c), in the grandchild table Y23, luminance data are defined for the character object lamp 9A over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the background notice luminance data table)
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining an example of a left-board lamp grandchild table in the background notice luminance data table. Each of the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the luminance is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting. In addition, when turning off is included as a concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance.

As shown in FIG. 70(a), the grandchild table L21 defines luminance data for the board left lamp 9B over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 70(b), the grandchild table L22 defines luminance data for the board left lamp 9B over T22-1 and T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 70(c), the grandchild table L23 defines luminance data for the board left lamp 9B over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grand table for on-board lamps in the background notice luminance data table)
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the background notice luminance data table. Each of the board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED of multiple colors (three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) in this example), and the data is as follows. The brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the luminance is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting. When turning off is included as the concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance.

As shown in FIG. 71(a), the grandchild table U21 defines luminance data for the on-board lamp 9C over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 71(b), the grandchild table U22 defines luminance data for the on-board lamp 9C over T22-1 and T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 71(c), the grandchild table U23 specifies luminance data for the on-board lamp 9C over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating at 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for attack lamp in background notice luminance data table)
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the background notice luminance data table. Each of the attack lamp 9E and the electric tube lamp 9H is an LED of multiple colors (three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) in this example), and the data is "0 ” to “F” represent the brightness. Also, the V-attacker lamp 9F is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the luminance is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting. In addition, when turning off is included as a concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), in the grandchild table A21, the brightness of each lamp of the attack lamp 9E, the electric tuning lamp 9H, and the V attack lamp 9F is changed over T21-1 to T21-2 at intervals of 50 msec. Data are specified.

As shown in FIG. 72(b), in the grandchild table A22, the brightness of each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric tuning lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F is changed over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec. Data are specified.

As shown in FIG. 72(c), in the sub-table A23, each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric tube lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F repeats over T23-1 to T23-6 at 240 msec and 230 msec. Luminance data is defined for

(Brightness data table at full lighting)
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining an example of the full lighting luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 73(a) to (h), in the full-lighting luminance data table, the frame lamp, the accessory lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board lamp 9C, the attack lamp 9E, the V attack lamp 9F, Brightness data of high brightness (in this example, the maximum value "F") is defined for each game effect lamp 9 such as an electric tuning lamp 9H, a V lamp 9G, a stick controller lamp 9J, and a trigger button lamp 9K. there is

(Brightness data table for PUSH effect)
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining an example of a luminance data table during PUSH effect. The PUSH effect is, as shown in FIG. 83(a19) described later, an effect that prompts the user to press the push button 31B.

FIG. 74(a) shows a luminance data table S41 for the stick controller lamp 9J. In S41, luminance data is defined for the stick controller lamp 9J over T41-1 to T41-4 at intervals of 20 msec. The lighting color of the stick controller lamp 9J during the PUSH effect is the same color (red in this example) as the lighting color of the frame lamp and the like during the group announcement effect.

FIG. 74(b) shows a brightness data table T41 for the trigger button lamp 9K. In T41, luminance data are defined for the trigger button lamp 9K over T51-1 to T512 at intervals of 150 msec. The lighting color of the trigger button lamp 9K during the PUSH effect is the same color (red in this example) as the lighting color of the frame lamp and the like during the group announcement effect.

(Child table in the group notice luminance data table according to the modified example)
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group announcement luminance data table according to the modification. As shown in FIG. 75, in the child table of the group notice luminance data table according to the modification, the group notice performance time is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table is referred to in each time slot. (also called luminance data table) is specified.

For example, during the period (2000 msec) until the middle of the first display period in the period during which the group notice effect is executed, W101 for the frame lamp, Y101 for the character lamp 9A, L101 for the left board lamp 9B, and L101 for the board lamp. A grandchild table of U101 for 9C and A101 for attacker lamp 9E is provided respectively. These grandchild tables correspond to the first luminance data table according to the modification.

Of the period during which the group announcement effect is executed, the remainder of the first display period, the second display period, and the third
In the period (2790 msec) until the middle of the display period, there are grandchild tables of W102 for the frame lamp, Y102 for the character lamp 9A, L102 for the board left lamp 9B, U102 for the on-board lamp 9C, and A102 for the attacker lamp 9E. is provided. These grandchild tables correspond to the second luminance data table according to the modification.

In the remaining period (150 msec) of the third display period in the period in which the group announcement effect is executed, W103 for the frame lamp, Y103 for the character object lamp 9A, L103 for the board left lamp 9B, and U103 for the board top lamp 9C. , and the attacker lamp 9E are provided with grandchild tables of A103. These grandchild tables correspond to the third luminance data table according to the modification.

Thus, in the group notice luminance data table according to the modified example, in the first luminance data table, control of the game effect lamp 9 starts at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and during the first display period The control of the game effect lamp 9 ends at 10:00, and in the second luminance data table, the control of the game effect lamp 9 starts during the first display period and the control of the game effect lamp 9 continues even during the second display period. Then, the control of the game effect lamp 9 ends during the third display period, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 starts during the third display period in the third luminance data table.

(Grandchild table for frame lamps in the group notice luminance data table according to the modified example)
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the group notice luminance data table according to the modification. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) in this example), and the data is "0" to "F , the luminance is expressed in hexadecimal. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting. When turning off is included as the concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), in the grandchild table W101, RGB data are defined for each lamp over T101-1 to T101-10 at equal intervals of 20 msec, and the final time T101-11 is defined. defines data for 10 minutes (600000 msec) for troubleshooting.

As shown in FIG. 76(b), in the grandchild table W102, RGB data are defined for each lamp over T102-1 to T102-10 at irregular intervals of 50 to 80 msec. W102 includes luminance data for causing one frame lamp to light up with high luminance and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp to light up at high luminance, and lamps that sparsely (randomly) light up with high luminance. The luminance data is defined so that For example, in W102, high luminance data (for example, "A") is sparsely defined so that a plurality of locations are lit with high luminance. As a result, in the group foretelling effect, the frame lamps sparsely light up with high brightness in accordance with the state in which the characters advance in a group in the group foretelling effect. W102 is designed to light more frame lamps with higher luminance than W101.

As shown in FIG. 76(c), in the grandchild table W103, RGB data are defined for the frame left lamp and the frame right lamp over T103-1 to T103-6 at intervals of 14 msec. After that, for the left lamp of the frame, RGB data is defined over T103-7 to T103-38 at short intervals of 2 msec, and for the right lamp of the frame, it is continued over T103-7 to T103-38 at long intervals of 14 msec. RGB data is defined.

In addition, in W103, from T103-2 to T103-30, the lamps that had been lit with high brightness from the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 are gradually extinguished or turned off so that they are lit with low intensity. Alternatively, the number of lamps that light up at low luminance is increased. In addition, for T103-7 to T103-38, in the case of the right frame lamps 9R2 to 9R12, the luminance data is specified at intervals of 14 msec, whereas the left frame lamp 9L5 positioned in the direction in which the character advances in the advance notice of the group. 9L12, the brightness data is defined so that the brightness changes from high brightness to off or low brightness at short intervals of 2 msec. As a result, the position where the frame lamp is extinguished or lit with low luminance is changed from the right side to the left side of the pachinko game machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left end of the screen in the group notice.

Further, in W103, luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or turned on with low luminance at the time of transition from T103 to T30. Furthermore, in W103, similarly to W101, luminance data for countermeasures against defects are defined in the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T103-39) of the third display period. During this 10-minute period, luminance data is defined so that the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at a low luminance so as not to make the frame lamp look uncomfortable when the next performance is started.

[Production Mode of Pachinko Machine 1]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 to 162, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. In the present embodiment, an effect mode will be described when one of the variation patterns of main variation numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 in which pseudo variation is performed twice is selected. In the drawing, hatching indicates how each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks.

(Production mode in stage A)
The mode of presentation in stage A will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 99. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 77(a1), when the variable display is started based on one reserved memory, the decorative design is variably displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5, The fourth pattern 5J is variably displayed, and the small pattern 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as the background during variable display. In this embodiment, as a character appearing in stage A, an image in which maid A (Mume-chan) is flying is displayed. During the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the variable display, and the effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 77(a2), when the pseudo continuous effect is performed and the characters "x2" indicating that the second variable display is performed are displayed, as shown in FIG. 77(a3). , the second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 78(a4), the pseudo continuous effect is further performed, and when the characters "x3" indicating that the third variable display is to be performed are displayed, as shown in FIG. 78(a5). , the variable display is performed for the third time. After that, as shown in FIG. 78(a6), when "3" stops in the left decorative design display area 5L and "3" also stops in the right decorative design display area 5R, the variable display mode changes to reach. form.

As shown in FIG. 79(a7), a decoration pattern for a reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has changed to the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 79(a8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. In the state shown in FIG. 79(a8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp light up with high luminance. During the reach line production, the production sounds corresponding to the reach line production are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 79(a9), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen begins to rotate in the horizontal direction, and the flash of light increases.

As shown in FIG. 80(a10), the decoration pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the horizontal direction, the flash of light increases, and the reach line appears in the center of the screen. The reach line is a line of light (light ray) that connects between the left and right decorative patterns that constitute the reach mode, and is given a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the form of the variable display has become the reach form or that it will become the reach form.

As shown in FIG. 80(a11), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light increases, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 80(a12), the decoration pattern in the center of the screen returns to its original position, and the reach line in the center of the screen further extends in the horizontal direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 80, during the reach line effect, frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6 and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen light up with high luminance.

As shown in FIG. 81(a13), the decoration pattern in the center of the screen gradually expands step by step, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends in the horizontal direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 81(a14), the decoration pattern at the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line at the center of the screen is further extended in the horizontal direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 81(a15), the decoration pattern in the center of the screen is further expanded, and the reach line in the center of the screen further extends in the horizontal direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 81, in the reach line, frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen light up with high luminance.

As shown in FIG. 82(a16), the decoration pattern at the center of the screen gradually shrinks step by step this time, and the reach line at the center of the screen begins to shrink in the horizontal direction (inward) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 82(b17), the decoration pattern in the center of the screen is further reduced, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further reduced in the horizontal direction (inward) of the screen, and stops at a fixed position. At this time, frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen light up with high luminance. After that, as shown in FIG. 82(a18), the reach line in the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 82(a18), when the 6-person group notice is executed, the effect shifts to that shown in FIG. 83(a19), and when the background notice is executed, FIG. It shifts to the effect shown in (a101), and when the lamp notice is executed, shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 93 (a111).

As described above, the 6-person group notice is an effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols will be a predetermined jackpot symbol, and the 6 characters dressed as maids are a group. It is a production that progresses. The background notice is a production that suggests that the display result of the variable display of special figures and decoration figures will be a predetermined jackpot pattern, and a specific character (for example, a main character, a rare character, etc.) is a specific character. It is an effect that is displayed with a background (for example, a background of a starry sky). The lamp notice is an effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display of the special figure and the decorative figure will be a predetermined jackpot pattern, and is a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the role lamp 9A, etc.). is a production that lights up or flashes. In the lamp notice, any one lamp or a plurality of lamps among the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 may light or blink, or lamps provided other than the game effect lamp 9 may light or blink. You can blink.

In stage A, after the pre-variation reach line effect, group announcement (for example, 6-person group announcement or Boingo group announcement) is executed. For example, when the six-person group announcement is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 83 (a19). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for the pressing operation are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH!!" be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9 is lit in a mode corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. For example, during the PUSH effect, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K light up or blink. Note that during the PUSH presentation, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to prompt the player to press the push button 31B. As described above, in the PUSH effect, the player is prompted to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, lighting or blinking a lamp, or making a sound.

As shown in FIG. 83(a20), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, the image indicating the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and "PUSH! !” appears as if the character image disappears. Also, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that the push button 31B has been effectively pressed during the PUSH effect. The output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R ends before the group announcement performance (6-person group announcement in this example) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 83(a21), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 is temporarily returned to display of a normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 84(a22), the announcement of the group of six starts, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 is once turned off. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the group announcement effect will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 84(a23), in the first display period, the main character Maid A (Mume-chan) appears as the first (first) character. The state shown in FIG. 84(a23) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 47(a). It represents a first situation in which a portion (in this example a portion of a face) is displayed.

During execution of the six-person group announcement, each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9 is lit in a mode corresponding to the group announcement effect based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 positioned near the characters appearing in the advance notice of the group start to light up with high brightness, and then, in the direction in which the characters advance. At the same time, the part of the lamp that lights up with high brightness is moved. In addition, when the group notice effect (6-person group notice, explosion notice, Boingo notice described later) is executed, other images other than the image related to the group notice effect (for example, the background image, the image related to the first half of the SP reach notice effect, etc. ), the brightness is lowered. The brightness of the other images, which has decreased during the group preview effect, gradually returns to the original brightness step by step during the third display period. On the other hand, for the player, such as the fourth pattern 5J and the small pattern 5M indicating the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories, the first reserved memory display area 5D, the second reserved memory display area 5U, the active display area 5A, etc. A higher priority is given to the display of information on a game having a high degree of importance in terms of victory or defeat of the game and the degree of advantage, so that the brightness is not lowered even if the group notice effect is executed.

During the group announcement effect, the effect sounds corresponding to the group announcement effect are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As for the volume of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, as shown in FIG. The sound volume of the effect sound is increased to a specific sound volume during the display period, the sound volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific sound volume during the second display period, and the sound volume of the effect sound is decreased during the third display period. It should be noted that when the group foretelling effect starts, a start sound suggesting the start of the group foretelling effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R separately from the effect sound corresponding to the group foretelling effect, but the second character appears. By the time the output of the start sound stops.

As shown in FIG. 84(a24), the second character appears shortly after the first character appears. The state shown in FIG. 84(a24) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 47(b). Maid B (Jam-chan), which was displayed more than the first situation and was displayed second, was not fully displayed yet, but part of the maid B (part of the face in this example) was displayed. It represents the second situation.

As shown in FIG. 85(a25), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. As shown in FIG. 85(a26), an animation is displayed in which the character appearing second skips the character appearing first. As shown in FIG. 85(a27), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side to the right side of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 86(a28), the characters continue to progress, and eventually the second character running at the top (head) reaches the left end of the screen. As shown in FIG. 86(a29), the second character that appears running at the top (head) starts disappearing from the left end of the screen. As shown in FIG. 86(a30), the character that appears second to run at the top disappears first from the left end of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 87(a31), during the second display period, an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side to the right side of the screen. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the frame lamps sparsely light up with high brightness in accordance with the manner in which the characters advance in groups in the group announcement effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or flashes in time with the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through. Also, the effect sound corresponding to the group announcement output from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display of characters running through. After that, as shown in FIGS. 87(a32) to 88(a36), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 89(a37), in the third display period, an animation is displayed in which the last character appears and runs from the left side to the right side of the screen with the other characters. Note that no new character appears in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the frame lamps are extinguished or lowered from the right side to the left side of the pachinko game machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left end of the screen in the group notice. It comes to change the position to light up with brightness. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 89(a37), when the third display period starts, all the game effect lamps 9 once turn on with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 89(a38), as the character disappears to the left end of the screen, the frame lamps begin to go out. In the example shown in FIG. 89(a38), the character is not displayed in the right half area of the screen, so part of the frame right lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 89(a39), the number of extinguished frame right lamps 9R increases as the character disappears further to the left end of the screen.

As shown in FIGS. 90(a40) and (a41), the number of game effect lamps 9 that are extinguished increases as the character gradually disappears. As shown in FIG. 90(a42), when the last character disappears, the group announcement effect ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 91, a comparison example of a 6-person group advance notice and a 6-person group advance notice according to the present embodiment will be compared. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 91(a201), similarly to the present embodiment shown in FIG. (part of the face in this example) is displayed.

After that, in the present embodiment shown in FIG. 84(a24), while the initially displayed maid A is not entirely displayed yet, part of the maid A is displayed more than in the first situation, and 2 While the whole of the maid B (Jam-chan) who is displayed second is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (a part of the face in this example) is displayed. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 91 (a202), the second maid B does not appear, and the maid A continues to run and the maid A is displayed in its entirety. Then, in the comparative example shown in FIG. 91 (a203), the second maid B finally appears after the first maid A runs through the left side of the center of the screen. In such a comparative example, only one character appears, and it does not look like a group announcement effect.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 90, animations are displayed in which a plurality of characters appear one after another and run through without any gaps between them. By doing so, a powerful performance can be achieved. In addition, since the number of characters overtaking other characters is smaller than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaking characters, it is possible to prevent the group announcement effect from becoming too complicated. It should be noted that the number of characters overtaking other characters may be greater than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaking character. In this case, it is possible to show the player a lively group announcement effect.

When the background notice is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 92 (a101). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for the pressing operation are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH!!" be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9 is lit in a mode corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 92(a102), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an image indicating the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a meter image, and "PUSH! !” disappears. Also, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92(a103), a specific character (maid B (Jam-chan) in this example) is displayed on the image display device together with a specific background (starry sky background in this example) as a background notice effect. 5 is displayed on the screen. Further, during the effect of the background notice, each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the effect of the background notice based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. Note that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the effect of the background notice.

When the ramp notice is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 93 (a111). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for the pressing operation are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH!!" be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9 is lit in a mode corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 93(a112), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an image indicating the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a meter image, and "PUSH! !” disappears. Also, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(a113), a lamp notice is executed, and a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the accessory lamp 9A, etc.) lights or blinks. Note that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the effect of the lamp notice.

After the third display period of the group notice ends as shown in FIG. 90(a42), or after the background notice shown in FIG. 92(a103) or the lamp notice shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 98, the symbol feed effect is executed. The pattern feed effect is determined whether or not the decorative pattern being variably displayed (in this embodiment, the decorative pattern in the central decorative pattern display area 5C) is stopped in the decorative pattern in the ready-to-win state, and the decoration to be stopped. This is an effect that arouses the player whether or not the pattern is a decorative pattern that constitutes a big win pattern. During the symbol feed effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the symbol feed effect based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that the effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the pattern feed effect.

As shown in FIG. 94(a43), when the symbol feed effect starts, the decorative symbols that are being variably displayed located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C are displayed in a large size, and are displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slow speed). ) to start variable display. At this time, the pattern feed effect is started from the same decorative pattern (that is, the decorative pattern constituting the big win) as the decorative pattern positioned in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R in the ready-to-win mode, and the starting position. is a lower position apart from the decorative pattern in the reach mode.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 94(a44) to 95(a48), the decoration pattern in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, slower speed). After that, as shown in FIGS. 96(a49) to 97(a54), as the central decorative pattern is variably displayed, the speed of variable display of the decorative pattern increases, and as shown in FIGS. 98(a55) to (a57). As shown, the middle decorative pattern is finally variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, a speed faster than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 98(a57), when the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed over two rounds, the symbol feeding effect is completed.

After the pattern feed effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 99(a58) and (a59), the image including the character image and the decoration pattern of "3" in the ready-to-win state is reproduced by the effect called whiteout. The color gradually becomes white, and finally the image including the character image and the decoration pattern of "3" in the ready-to-reach mode is completely invisible. After that, as shown in FIG. 99(a59), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side that has become white due to the whiteout is gradually increased, the effect image for post-variation that has been switched on the back side is displayed on the screen. appear above.

(Production mode in the first half of SP reach)
100 to 108, description will be given of the effects in the first half of the SP reach.

As shown in FIGS. 100(a61) and (a62), the character animation is displayed until the SP reach title image is displayed after shifting to the post-variation. The character may be a character with high priority, such as the main character, or a character that appears in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 100 (a63), the title of SP reach is displayed. In the present embodiment, as an effect of SP reach, a maid character such as Mumu-chan catches Bakuchu, so the title "Catch Bakuchu!" is displayed. During the performance of the first half of the SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the first half of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 101(c1), when the effect in the first half of the SP reach is executed, an image in which the maid A (Muyume-chan) is standing upright is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 101(c2), an image is displayed in which Bakuchu, which is the opponent's character (enemy character), is surprised. After that, as shown in FIGS. 101(c3) to 102(c5), an animation is displayed in which Maid A chases Bakuchu, who runs away.

As shown in FIG. 102(c6), after an animation is displayed in which the maid A jumps on Bakuchu, if there is a failure (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 9), the production shifts to that shown in FIG. 103(c11). However, at the time of the big hit (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 20), it shifts to the production shown in FIG. When moving to the final reach (in the case of the variation patterns of the main variation numbers 15 and 26), it moves to the effect shown in FIG. 108 (c31).

When the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 102(c6), the effect shown in FIG. 103(c11) is performed. In the effect shown in FIG. 103(c11), an image is displayed in which the maid A is depressed because she cannot catch Baku-chu, and the decorative design positioned in the central decorative design display area 5C is the missing design "4". ” stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 103(c12), the color of the image including the character image and the decoration pattern of "3", "4", and "3" in the lost mode is changed by a production effect called blackout. It gradually turns black, and as shown in FIG. 103(c13), the image including the character image and the decoration patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which are in a failing mode is completely invisible. .

After that, as shown in FIGS. 104(c14) and (c15), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side that has been blackened by the blackout is gradually increased, the normal background that has been switched on the back side becomes transparent. The production image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (c16), the variable display of the decoration pattern is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M is also completely stopped, and the loss is confirmed.

When the big hit is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 105 (c21) is performed after the effect shown in FIG. 102 (c6). In the effect shown in FIG. 105 (c21), an image of Maid A catching Bakuchu and giving out a peace sign is displayed, and a jackpot symbol is displayed as a decoration symbol positioned in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C. 3” stops.

After that, a fanfare effect is executed. In the fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. 105(c22), the decoration pattern consisting of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands step by step, and as shown in FIG. 105(c23). , the decorative pattern is displayed so as to protrude from the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 106(c24) and (c25), an animation is displayed in which the decoration pattern moves. Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (c26), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the big win is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 107(c27) to (c29), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Muyume-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation is displayed in which the letters "FEVER!"

When shifting to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 102 (c6), the effect moves to the effect shown in FIG. 108 (c31). In the effect shown in FIG. 108(c31), an image is displayed in which the maid A is depressed because she cannot catch Bakuchu, and the missing symbol "4" is displayed as the decorative symbol positioned in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. ” stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 108(c32), the color of the image including the character image and the decorative symbols of "3", "4", and "3" in the lost mode gradually turns black due to blackout. Up to this point, the effect is the same as in the case of losing in the first half of the SP reach shown in FIGS. 103(c11) and (c12). However, as shown in FIG. 108 (c33), when shifting to the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, an effect is executed in which the movable body 32 drops, which did not occur in the case of losing in the first half of the SP reach.

Then, after the effect in which the movable body 32 falls is executed, in the case of transitioning to the second half of the SP reach (in the case of the variation patterns of the main variation numbers 12 and 23), the effect shown in FIG. When shifting to ready-to-win (in the case of the fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26), it shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 116 (c71). In this way, the variation pattern that becomes a big hit includes a variation pattern in which it is assumed that the loss is once decided in the first half of the SP reach, and then the transition to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach is made. As a result, from the player's point of view, after once thinking that the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, the recovery will shift to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Production mode in the second half of SP reach)
109 to 115, the effect mode in the second half of the SP reach will be described.

When shifting to the second half of the SP reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 108 (c33), the effect is shifted to the effect shown in FIG. 109 (c41). In the effect shown in FIG. 109(c41), the character image and the background image are completely invisible.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (c42), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side that has been blackened by the blackout is gradually increased, the effect image of the latter half of the SP reach that has been switched on the back side appears. It becomes visible. During the performance of the latter half of the SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9 is lit in a mode corresponding to the latter half of the SP reach based on a predetermined luminance data table. Note that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the second half of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 109 (c42), when the second half of SP Reach is performed, maid A (Mume-chan) and maid B (Jam-chan) are standing upright and declaring war on Bakuchu. An image is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 109(c43) to 110(c45), an animation is displayed in which the maids A and B chase after the escaping Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 109 (c46), after the animation of maid A and maid B jumping on Bakuchu is displayed, the time of failure (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 12) is shown in FIG. 111 (c51). Transition to production, when the jackpot (in the case of the variation pattern of the main variation number 23) is shifted to the production shown in FIG. shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 116 (c71).

When the loss is confirmed in the second half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 110 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 113 (c51). In the effect shown in FIG. 113 (c51), an image is displayed in which Maid A and Maid B are depressed because they are unable to catch Bakuchu. A certain "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (c52), the color of the image including the character image and the decoration pattern of "3", "4", and "3" in the lost mode gradually turns black by blackout, As shown in FIG. 111 (c53), the image including the character image and the decorative symbols of "3", "4", and "3" in the fail mode is completely invisible.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 112(c54) and (c55), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side that has been blackened by the blackout is gradually increased, the normal background that has been switched on the back side becomes transparent. The production image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 112 (c56), the variable display of the decoration pattern is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M is also completely stopped, and the failure is confirmed.

When the big hit is confirmed in the second half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 110 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 113 (c61). In the effect shown in FIG. 113 (c61), an image of Maid A and Maid B catching Bakuchu and giving a peace sign is displayed, and a jackpot symbol is displayed as a decoration symbol located in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C. "3" stops.

After that, a fanfare effect is executed. In the fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. 113 (c62), the decoration pattern consisting of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands step by step, and as shown in FIG. 113 (c63). , the decorative pattern is displayed so as to protrude from the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 114(c64) and (c65), an animation is displayed in which the decoration pattern moves. Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (c66), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, thereby confirming the big win.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 115(c67) to (c69), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Muyume-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation is displayed in which the letters "FEVER!"

(Production mode in the final reach)
116 to 126, description will be given of the mode of presentation in the final reach.

When shifting to the final reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 110 (c46), the effect is shifted to the effect shown in FIG. 116 (c71). When shifting to the final reach, as shown in FIG. 116 (c71), the entire screen suddenly turns black, and as shown in FIG. 116 (c72), a cross-shaped light effect is displayed in the center of the screen. be done. After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (c73), an effect is executed to notify the start of the final reach, and the face image of the main character, Maid A (Muyume-chan), is displayed on the full screen, and "Let's go! ” is displayed. 116(c72) is a combination of the blackout effect shown in FIG. 116(c71) and the display of the main character's face image shown in FIG. 116(c73). It is daringly inserted between them. As a result, the effect shown in FIG. 116 (c72) can inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game will reach the final reach.

After that, the production during the final reach is executed. During the presentation of the latter half of the final reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9 is lit in a mode corresponding to the latter half of the final reach based on a predetermined luminance data table. Note that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the second half of the final reach.

As shown in FIG. 117(c74), an image of maid A giving a peace sign is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 117(c75) to 117(c78), an image of each character is displayed at a plurality of timings, and an image of the entire sentence is displayed as shown in FIG. 117(c79). This indicates the theme of the production that will be executed in the final reach. In this example, it is indicated as "all members set".

After that, as shown in FIGS. 119(c80) to 120(c85), an animation is displayed in which characters appearing in the last reach effect are introduced at a plurality of timings. For example, in this example, maid F, maid E, maid D, maid C, maid B, and maid A appear in order from the supporting characters, and near the end (or in the latter half), the main character has a high priority. A character appears. Note that the characters may appear in order of priority, such as the main character. That is, it is preferable that a high-priority character such as the main character appear at the beginning (or the first half) or near the end (or the latter half) so as to stand out more than the low-priority characters such as supporting characters.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (c86), when the final reach effect is executed, an image is displayed in which the six characters who appeared in the six-person group notice are standing upright and declaring war against Bakuchu. be done. After that, as shown in FIGS. 121(c87) to 122(c89), an animation is displayed in which six characters chase the escaping Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 122(c90), after an animation is displayed in which the six characters rush to blow up, a trigger effect is executed as shown in FIG. 122(c91). When the trigger effect is executed, an image showing the stick controller 31A and a meter image showing the time limit during which the stick controller 31A can be operated are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the characters "Close!!" An image is displayed.

After the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A during the trigger effect shown in FIG. 122 (c91), when there is a loss (in the case of the variation pattern of the main variation number 15), the effect shifts to that shown in FIG. (In the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 26) shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 124 (c111).

In the event that a failure is confirmed in the final reach, after the stick controller 31A is pulled during the trigger effect shown in FIG. 122 (c91), the effect moves to that shown in FIG. 123 (c101). In the effect shown in FIG. 123 (c101), an image is displayed in which six characters are depressed because they cannot catch Bakuchu, and the decorative design positioned in the central decorative design display area 5C is a lost design. "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (c102), the color of the image including the character image and the decoration pattern of "3", "4", and "3" in the lost mode is gradually blackened by blackout, As shown in FIG. 123 (c103), the image including the character image and the decorative symbols of "3", "4", and "3" in the fail mode is completely invisible.

After that, although illustration is omitted, when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side that was blackened by the blackout is gradually increased, the effect image for the normal background that was switched on the back side appears. Become. Then, the variable display of the decoration pattern is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M is also completely stopped, and the failure is confirmed.

When a big hit is confirmed in the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 122 (c91) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 124 (c111). In the effect shown in FIG. 124 (c111), an image of six characters catching Bakuchu is displayed, and the jackpot symbol "3" is displayed as the decorative symbol positioned in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. Stop.

After that, a fanfare effect is executed. In the fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. 124 (c112), the decoration pattern consisting of "3", "3", "3" gradually expands step by step, and as shown in FIG. 124 (c113). , the decorative pattern is displayed so as to protrude from the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 125(c114) and (c115), an animation is displayed in which the decoration pattern moves. Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (c116), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the big win is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 126(c117) to (c119), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Muyume-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation is displayed in which the characters "FEVER!"

(Production Mode in Stage B)
127 to 147, description will be given of the mode of presentation in stage B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 127(b1), when the variable display starts based on one reserved memory, on the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative designs are variably displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, The fourth pattern 5J is variably displayed, and the small pattern 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as the background during variable display. In this embodiment, an image of Bakuchu is displayed as a character that appears in stage B. FIG. During the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the variable display, and the effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 127(b2), when the pseudo continuous effect is performed and the characters "x2" indicating that the second variable display is performed are displayed, as shown in FIG. 127(b3). , the second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 127(b4), the pseudo continuous effect is further performed, and when the characters "x3" indicating that the third variable display is to be performed are displayed, as shown in FIG. 128(b5). , the variable display is performed for the third time. After that, as shown in FIG. 128(b6), when "3" stops in the left decorative design display area 5L and "3" also stops in the right decorative design display area 5R, the variable display mode changes to reach. form.

As shown in FIG. 129(b7), a decoration pattern for reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has changed to the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 129(b8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. The brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 59 to 65 are the same as the brightness data table used in the stage A reach line production. In the state shown in FIG. 129(b8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp light up with high luminance. During the reach line production, the production sounds corresponding to the reach line production are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 129(b9), the decoration pattern in the center of the screen begins to rotate in the horizontal direction, and the flash of light increases.

As shown in FIG. 130(b10), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the horizontal direction, the flash of light increases, and the reach line appears in the center of the screen. The reach line is a line of light (light ray) that connects between the left and right decorative patterns that constitute the reach mode, and is given a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the form of the variable display has become the reach form or that it will become the reach form. The reach lines appearing in stage B may be the same as the reach lines appearing in stage A, or may differ in color, shape, size, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 130(b11), the decoration pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light increases, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 130(b12), the decoration pattern in the center of the screen returns to its original position, and the reach line in the center of the screen further extends in the horizontal direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 130, during the reach line effect, frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen light up with high luminance.

As shown in FIG. 131 (b13), the decoration pattern in the center of the screen gradually expands step by step, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends in the horizontal direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 131 (b14), the decoration pattern in the center of the screen is further expanded, and the reach line in the center of the screen further extends in the horizontal direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 131 (b15), the decoration pattern in the center of the screen is further expanded, and the reach line in the center of the screen further extends in the horizontal direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 131, in the reach line, frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen light up with high luminance.

As shown in FIG. 132(b16), the decoration pattern in the center of the screen gradually shrinks step by step this time, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to shrink in the horizontal direction (inward) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 132(b17), the decoration pattern in the center of the screen is further reduced, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further reduced in the horizontal direction (inward) of the screen, and stops at a fixed position. At this time, frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen light up with high luminance. After that, as shown in FIG. 132(b18), the reach line in the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 132(b18), the symbol feed effect is executed as shown in FIGS. During the symbol feed effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the symbol feed effect based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that the effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the pattern feed effect.

As shown in FIG. 133(b19), when the pattern feed effect starts, the decorative pattern being variably displayed located in the central decorative pattern display area 5C is displayed in a large size, and is displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slow speed). ) to start variable display. At this time, the pattern feed effect is started from the same decorative pattern (that is, the decorative pattern constituting the big win) as the decorative pattern positioned in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R in the ready-to-win mode, and the starting position. is a lower position apart from the decorative pattern in the reach mode.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 133(b20) to 134(b24), the decoration pattern in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, slower speed). After that, as shown in FIGS. 135(b25) to 136(b30), as the middle decorative pattern is variably displayed, the speed of the variable display of the decorative pattern increases, and as shown in FIGS. 137(b31) to 137(b33) As shown, the middle decorative pattern is finally variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, a speed faster than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 137 (b33), when the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed over two rounds, the symbol forward effect is completed.

138(b34) and (b35), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative symbol "3" in the ready-to-reach mode gradually turns white. Ultimately, the image including the character image and the decoration pattern of "3" in the ready-to-reach mode is completely invisible. After that, as shown in FIG. 138(b36), when the transparency of the whole screen on the front side that has become white due to the whiteout is gradually increased, the effect image for post-variation that has been switched on the back side appears on the screen. appear above.

As shown in FIGS. 139(b37) and (b38), after transitioning to post-variation, character animation is displayed until the SP reach title image is displayed. The character may be a character with high priority, such as the main character, or a character that appears in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 139 (b39), the title of SP Reach (“Catch Bakuchu!”) is displayed. During the performance of the first half of the SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the first half of the SP reach.

In stage B, the group notice (for example, explosive chuu notice or Boingo group notice) is executed during the period in which the title display of the first half of the SP reach of the post-variation is being performed. For example, when the Bakuchu group notice is executed during the period in which the title of the first half of the SP reach is being displayed, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 140 (b40). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for the pressing operation are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH!!" be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9 is lit in a mode corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. For example, during the PUSH effect, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K light up or blink. Note that during the PUSH presentation, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to prompt the player to press the push button 31B. As described above, in the PUSH effect, the player is prompted to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, lighting or blinking a lamp, or making a sound.

As shown in FIG. 140(b41), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, the image indicating the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and "PUSH! !” disappears. Also, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that the push button 31B has been effectively pressed during the PUSH effect. The output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R ends before the group forewarning effect (in this example, the explosion group forewarning) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 140(b42), the display of the screen of the image display device 5 is temporarily returned to the normal display of the background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b43), the explosive group notice starts, but before the character appears, the game effect lamp 9 is once turned off. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the group announcement effect will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b44), the first (first) character appears in the first display period. Note that the state shown in FIG. 141 (b44) is that the first (first) displayed character is not entirely displayed yet, but a part of the first displayed character (in this example, a part of the face) is displayed. ) represents the first situation.

During execution of the explosion group notice, each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the group notice effect based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 141 to 143, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 positioned near the characters appearing in the advance notice of the group start to light up with high brightness, and then, in the direction in which the characters advance. At the same time, the part of the lamp that lights up with high brightness is moved.

During the group announcement effect, the effect sounds corresponding to the group announcement effect are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As for the volume of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, as shown in FIG. The sound volume of the effect sound is increased to a specific sound volume during the display period, the sound volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific sound volume during the second display period, and the sound volume of the effect sound is decreased during the third display period. It should be noted that when the group foretelling effect starts, a start sound suggesting the start of the group foretelling effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R separately from the effect sound corresponding to the group foretelling effect, but the second character appears. By the time the output of the start sound stops.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b45), the second character appears soon after the first character appears. In the state shown in FIG. 141(b45), the first displayed character is not fully displayed yet, while a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first state, and the second state is displayed. 2 represents a second situation in which a part of the second displayed character (a part of the face in this example) is displayed while the entire character displayed in 1 is not yet displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 142(b46) to (b48), characters appear one after another, and an animation is displayed in which they run from the left side to the right side of the screen. Note that the display area on the screen used in the group notice effect is larger than the display area of "Catch Bakuchu!" in the SP first half title notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 143(b49), the characters continue to advance, and eventually the first displayed character running at the top (head) reaches the left end of the screen. As shown in FIG. 143(b50), the first displayed character running at the top (head) starts disappearing from the left end of the screen. As shown in FIG. 143(b51), the first displayed character running at the top disappears first from the left end of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 144(b52), during the second display period, characters appear one after another and an animation is displayed in which they run from the left side of the screen to the right side. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, the frame lamps sparsely light up with high brightness in accordance with the manner in which the characters advance in groups in the group announcement effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or flashes in time with the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through. Also, the effect sound corresponding to the group announcement output from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display of characters running through. After that, as shown in FIGS. 144(b52) to 145(b57), characters appear one after another, and an animation running from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed.

As a group of characters run from the left side to the right side of the screen, the characters cover the entire screen, making it difficult or impossible for the player to visually recognize the title display of "Catch Bakuchu!" .

As shown in FIG. 146(b58), in the third display period, an animation is displayed in which the last character appears and runs from the left side to the right side of the screen with the other characters. Note that no new character appears in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, the frame lamps are extinguished or lowered from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect in which the character disappears to the left end of the screen in the group notice. It comes to change the position to light up with brightness. In addition, as shown in FIG. 146 (b58), when the third display period starts, all of the game effect lamps 9 are once turned on with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 146 (b59), as the character disappears to the left end of the screen, the frame lamps begin to go out. In the example shown in FIG. 146(b59), the character is not displayed in the right half area of the screen, so part of the frame right lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 146(b60), as the character further disappears to the left end of the screen, the number of extinguished frame right lamps 9R increases.

As shown in FIG. 146, as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen, the title display "Catch Bakuchu!" gradually reappears. At this time, if the lottery for the first half of the SP title is won, the first half of the SP title is announced by changing the display mode (for example, color, pattern, shape, etc.) of the title display of "Catch Bakuchu!" . For example, as shown in FIG. 139 (b39), before the Bakuchu group announcement is executed, the text "Catch Bakuchu!" in the title display in the first half of the SP reach is white, but FIG. 2, after that, when the character image in the group announcement is displayed in the layer on the front side of the layer where the title is displayed, the title display becomes difficult or invisible. While the entire screen is covered with the character image in the group notice, the characters in the title display "Catch Bakuchu!" disappears to the left edge of the screen, the red title display gradually appears in stages.

As shown in FIGS. 147(b61) and (b62), the number of game effect lamps 9 that are extinguished increases as the character gradually disappears. As shown in FIG. 147(b63), when the last character disappears, the group announcement effect ends. After that, it shifts to the production of the first half of the SP reach shown in FIG. 101(c1).

(Boingo group notice)
148 to 157, description will be given of the effect mode of Boingo group announcement.

In the six-person group notice and the explosion group notice mentioned above, a plurality of characters advance in groups from the right end to the left end of the screen. In this manner, the 6-person group notice and the explosion group notice were presentations in which the characters progressed in the X-axis direction on the XY plane shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the boingo group announcement, the character (boingo) can also move in the Z-axis direction of the screen. That is, the Boingo group announcement is a 3D effect in which the character progresses in a three-dimensional space of XYZ.

FIGS. 148 to 153 are diagrams for explaining an effect mode when Boingo group announcement is executed in stage A. FIG. It should be noted that even when Boingo group is executed in stage B, the effect mode is the same as that shown in FIGS. Also, although not shown, the Boingo group forewarning effect is provided with a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period, like the six-person group forewarning effect and the explosive group forewarning effect.

As shown in FIG. 148(d1), the Boingo group notice starts, but the game effect lamp 9 turns off once before the character appears. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the group announcement effect will be executed from now on.

During execution of the Boingo group notice, for example, based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 52 to 58, each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the group notice effect. For example, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the characters appearing in the advance notice of the group start lighting with high brightness, and then the lamps lighting with high brightness move in accordance with the direction in which the character advances. In addition, the frame lamps sparsely light up with high brightness in accordance with the manner in which the characters advance in a group in the group announcement effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or flashes in time with the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through. Also, the effect sound corresponding to the group announcement output from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display of characters running through.

As shown in FIG. 148(d2), a front-stage image with a light effect is displayed as a front-stage presentation before the character (Boingo) appears at a specific position on the screen. A specific position is a group appearance point where a group of characters appears. After that, as shown in FIG. 148(d3), the first character appears from a specific position that has become difficult to see due to the preceding image due to the light effect.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 149(d4) and (d5), the second and third characters appear, and an animation is displayed in which each character gradually moves toward the screen step by step. be done. As shown in FIG. 149(d6), as the first displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible due to the first character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 150(d7) to (d9), the characters form a group and advance from the depth side of the screen to the front side, thereby covering the entire screen. As shown in FIGS. 151(d10) to (d12), the last character appears and progresses from the depth side of the screen to the front side.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 152(d13) and (d14), as the last character advances from the depth side of the screen toward the near side, it covers most of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 152(d15), the last character is enlarged and displayed from one end to the other end of the screen, and the entire screen is covered with the last character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 153(d16) and (d17), as the last character disappears from the screen, the original background image is displayed, and as shown in 153(d18), when the last character disappears. The group forewarning effect ends.

FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining the details of the Boingo group notice. FIGS. 154(A) to (F) correspond to FIGS. 148(d3) to 149(d6) and FIGS. 150(d8) and (d9), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 154(A), the first character appears from the group appearance point, and as shown in FIGS. 154(B) to (F), characters appear one after another from the group appearance point. Here, as the first displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible due to the first character. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 154(E) and 154(F), even if a subsequent character image is placed at a position hidden by the first character, it cannot be seen. good too.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156, a comparative example of Boingo group announcement and the Boingo group announcement according to the present embodiment will be compared. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 155, a character (Boingo) appears at a specific position (group appearance point) on the screen, but the previous image due to the light effect as shown in FIG. 148(d2) is not displayed. Therefore, in order to eliminate the sense of incongruity that the character suddenly appears large, the animation must be created so that the character is displayed in a small size and gradually enlarged in stages, as shown in FIGS. 155 and 156. .

Therefore, in the comparative example, the animation display as shown in FIGS. 155(d101) to 156(d105) is continued until the character can be displayed in the size shown in FIG. 148(d3) as shown in FIG. 156(d106). You have to go through it, which takes extra time for production, and you have to create images for animation. On the other hand, in the case of the picture form of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. By displaying the first character from a specific position that has become difficult to see due to the display of the previous image by the effect, the character can be displayed from the beginning at a certain size (the size shown in FIG. 148 (d3) and FIG. 156 (d106)). can be displayed.

(Modified example of Boingo group notice)
FIG. 157 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when Boingo group announcement according to the modification is executed. The example shown in FIG. 157 may be replaced with the example shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIGS. 157(d101) to (d103), the title image of the first half of the SP may be displayed as the last displayed character disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 148(d1), while the entire screen is covered with the character image in the group performance in the layer on the front side of the layer where the normal background image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 157(d103). Thus, the normal background image may be switched to the title image in the first half of the SP. In this way, the group notice effect may be executed while the notice effect such as the SP first half title notice effect is being executed.

Also, the title image in the first half of the SP in the Boingo group announcement may change the display mode as shown in FIG. 147 to announce a big hit. Also, instead of covering the entire screen by displaying the last character in an enlarged manner, the background image used for the group announcement effect may be switched to the next effect by animation in which the background image is rolled like a scroll.

(Dog herd notice)
158 to 160, description will be given of the manner in which the dog pack announcement is performed.

In the present embodiment, as the group notice effects, the six-person group notice, the explosion notice, and the Boingo group notice were exemplified. It is also possible to execute a group forewarning effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 158(e1), the first character is displayed, after which a plurality of dog characters appear one after another as shown in FIG. The screen area may be covered by the characters as shown in .

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 159(e4) to (e6), the title image of the first half of the SP is displayed as the last displayed character disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 158(e3), while the entire screen is covered with the character image in the group announcement effect in the layer on the front side of the layer where the normal background image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 159(e6) , the normal background image is switched to the title image in the first half of the SP. Then, on the screen after the plurality of characters positioned at the end have passed, the title image of the first half of the SP corresponding to the effect of the first half of the SP ready-to-win is displayed.

Also, the title image in the first half of the SP in the dog pack announcement may be an announcement of a big hit by changing the display mode as shown in FIG. 147 .

As shown in FIG. 160, when the six-person group notice and the dog group notice are compared, the distance between the character displayed first and the last character displayed in the dog group notice (the distance between the two characters on the X-axis) ) X2 is shorter than X1, the distance between the character displayed first and the character displayed last in the six-person group announcement (the length between them on the X axis). Also, since the execution time is the same or substantially the same for both, the speed V2 at which the character advances in the dog group advance notice is slower than the character advance speed V1 in the six-person group advance notice. Furthermore, the density D2 of the plurality of characters in the dog group announcement is greater than the density D1 of the plurality of characters in the six-person group announcement. In addition, the dog group foretelling performance has a higher degree of expectation (reliability) for a big hit than the six-person group foretelling performance, and the dog group foretelling performance has a lower appearance rate (execution probability) than the six-person group foretelling performance.

(Execution of group notice effect during reach line effect)
An effect mode when the group forewarning effect is executed during the reach line will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 161(f1), in a state where the reach line effect is executed, the group advance notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. ), a symbol feed effect may be executed.

[Main configuration and effects]
Technical effects obtained by various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are individually listed below.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
Group effect execution means for executing a group effect (for example, group pre-announcement effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group (for example, group pre-announcement execution processing shown in FIG. 37, 6 shown in FIGS. Crowd announcement performance) and
Blessing effect executing means for executing a blessing effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for displaying an image congratulating that the display result of the variable display has become the specific display result (for example, a process of executing a fanfare effect by the effect control CPU 120 ) and
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49),
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the display of a new character until the display of any character is finished first (for example, 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character ends (for example, the 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the character being displayed continues without the character being newly displayed (for example, in FIGS. 89(a37) to 90(a42). period shown),
The congratulatory effect can be executed after the group effect (for example, the fanfare effect shown in FIGS. 105 to 107 is executed after the six-person group foretelling effect shown in FIGS. 84 to 90 is executed),
When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a wrong display result different from the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 9), after the variable display starts, the variable In the first predetermined period (for example, the period of T1+T2 shown in FIG. 50) until the display is suggested to be the wrong display result, the first display period starts in the latter half of the first predetermined period. (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 50 and 51),
When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variation patterns of variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), and the variable display is performed after the start of the variable display In the second predetermined period until the specific display result is suggested (for example, the period of T3+T4, the period of T5+T6, the period of T7+T8), the first display period is the first half of the second predetermined period. starts (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 50 and 51).

As a result, in the group announcement effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends first. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect. Also, until the result of the variable display is finalized, the excitement may fade with the passage of time, but if the result of the variable display is a change pattern that results in a false display, it will be displayed in the second half of the variable display time. By executing the group forewarning effect, the feeling of exhilaration can be maintained or reawakened. On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is the winning display result, a fanfare effect, which is a blessing effect, is executed, so the group announcement effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time to give a sense of exhilaration. After that, even if the exhilaration fades with the passage of time, it is possible to maintain the exhilaration or evoke it again through the blessing production.

"Specific display result" is a display result that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display being the specific display result. That is, even if the specific display result is derived, it is a display result for controlling the game state to be advantageous. In this embodiment, when the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display portion 21 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit, the big hit occurs, and the lighting corresponding to the big hit A combination of aspects results in a specific display result. In addition, when the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display portion 22 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit, the big hit occurs, and the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit is specified. display result. Furthermore, the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are specific special patterns (for example, jackpots such as "3, 3, 3" and "7, 7, 7"). When it becomes a symbol combination) and stops, a big hit occurs, and the display of the specific special symbol becomes the specific display result.

A “losing display result” is a display result different from the specific display result, and is a display result that is not controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is the failing display result. That is, even if the lost display result is derived, the game state is not controlled to be in an advantageous state. In the present embodiment, when the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display portion 21 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the loss, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the loss A combination of corresponding lighting modes will result in a false display result. Also, when the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display portion 22 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes a combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the loss, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the lighting mode corresponding to the loss The combination will result in a lost display result. Further, the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 become specific predetermined patterns (for example, a combination of missing patterns such as "3, 2, 3") and stop. Sometimes the result of the game is a loss, and the display of the predetermined symbol is a loss display result.

The “advantageous state” is a state that is advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state in which the game value addition rate (for example, game ball payout rate) is 1 or more or exceeds 1 by being controlled. In this embodiment, as an advantageous state, a jackpot game state is exemplified that is controlled when each of the normal jackpots 1 and 2 and the variable probability jackpots 1 to 9 occurs. In addition, the advantageous state may be a small hit game state controlled when a small hit occurs, or may be a probability variable state or a time saving state.

The "new character display" may be the same type of character as the character first displayed in the group announcement effect, or a different type of character from the character first displayed in the group announcement effect. good.

"Blessing effect" is a effect of displaying an image congratulating that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result, and is controlled to an advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. It is also a production that displays an image that congratulates. “Blessing” includes suggesting or notifying the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or that control will be in an advantageous state. In addition, "bless" improves the player's sense of expectation for an advantageous state by suggesting or announcing that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or that control will be performed to an advantageous state. including letting For example, the blessing effect is that the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit, and the special figure 2 variable display section of the special figure LED board 20 22 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a big hit, or the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are specific special patterns ( It includes displaying an image that suggests or notifies the player that the game has become a jackpot pattern) or that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

``The blessing effect can be executed after the group effect'' means that the group announcement effect is executed in the variable display based on the one reserved memory, and then the blessing effect is performed in the variable display based on the one reserved memory. Including the performance being performed. Further, "the blessing effect can be executed after the group effect" means that the display result of the variable display based on the one reserved memory is the specific display result. When a group forewarning effect is executed as a look-ahead effect for suggesting or foretelling before the start of the display result, the group forewarning effect is executed, and then variable display based on the pending memory of the 1 is started and the 1 is started. execution of the blessing effect within the variable display based on the reserved memory of

The "first predetermined period" is a period from when the variable display is started until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a false display result. exemplified by the period of T1+T2 shown in FIG. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a lost display result" is that the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display portion 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the loss , The combination of lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display portion 22 of the special figure LED board 20 corresponds to the big hit The combination of lighting modes corresponds to the loss, and the decorative pattern display area of the image display device 5 In 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols that are variably displayed become specific predetermined symbols (losing symbol combination) and stop. In addition, the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display is a losing display result, and the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display is a hit display result. , ``It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a failed display result'' indicates to the player that the display result of the variable display is a failed display result because the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing. Including informing. At the specific timing, an effect such as the above-described PUSH effect is performed to prompt the player to operate the operation means, and the player operates the operation means to operate the movable body 32 in the event of a big hit. may

The "second predetermined period" is a period from when the variable display is started until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, and in the present embodiment, it is shown in FIGS. are exemplified by the periods T3+T4, T5+T6, and T7+T8 shown in FIG. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result" means that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display portion 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the big hit. , The combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display portion 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit, and the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are variably displayed. Including that the decorative pattern being held becomes a specific special pattern (jackpot pattern combination) and stops. In addition, the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display is a losing display result, and the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display is a hit display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result" suggests to the player that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result by operating the movable body 32 at a specific timing. Including informing. At the specific timing, an effect such as the above-described PUSH effect is performed to prompt the player to operate the operation means, and the player operates the operation means to operate the movable body 32 in the event of a big hit. may

(1-2) The second display period is longer than each of the first display period and the third display period, and the third display period is longer than the first display period. (eg, each display period shown in FIG. 49).

Thus, by setting the second display period in which the characters appear one after another in the group foretelling effect to be the longest period, the group foretelling effect can be made powerful. Furthermore, by setting the first display period from the first appearance of the character to the first departure of the character to be the shortest period, it is possible to prevent the sudden execution of the group forewarning effect from becoming lazy. can be done.

(1-3) The character displayed first in the first display period is a character with a high priority in the contents of the gaming machine (for example, Yume-chan, the main character).

As a result, the character that first appears in the group announcement effect is a character with a high priority like the main character, and is a character that is familiar to the player, but after that, characters that appear less frequently than the main character in other effects. By appearing in the group notice performance, it is possible to surprise the players about the group notice performance and to make the players feel that it is a rare performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The "high priority character" includes the character with the highest priority among the main character and characters other than the main character appearing in the content used in the pachinko machine 1, and is executed in the pachinko machine 1 more than other characters. Including characters that appear frequently (number of times) in the production performed.

(1-4) When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variation patterns of variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), character display in the group effect is the first half of the second predetermined period, which is close to the half of the second predetermined period (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 50 and 51).

Thus, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is the result of the winning display, even if the group announcement performance is executed in the first half of the time of the variable display, the group announcement performance can be executed near the latter half even in the first half. So, it is possible to extend the reverberation of the group announcement effect even a little later.

(1-5) A pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, the variation patterns of the variation numbers 20, 23, and 26) is the display result of the variable display that is the lost display result. After pretending to be, the variable display result includes a remedy pattern (for example, the variation patterns of variation numbers 23 and 26) that becomes the specific display result,
Also in the remedy pattern, in the second predetermined period from when the variable display is started until it is suggested that the variable display is the specific display result, the first half of the second predetermined period is the first half of the second predetermined period. One display period begins (eg, examples shown in FIGS. 50 and 51).

As a result, even in the case of a relief pattern in which the display result of the variable display is a win display result after the display result of the variable display appears to be a losing display result, the fanfare effect, which is a congratulatory effect, is executed. , In the first half of the variable display time, the group notice effect is executed to create a sense of exhilaration, and even if the sense of exhilaration fades with the passage of time, the blessing effect continues or evokes the feeling of exhilaration again. can be

(1-6) A pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the above-mentioned lost display result (for example, the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 9, 12, and 15) and the display result of the variable display are the above-mentioned specific display results. (for example, the variation patterns of the main variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the lost display result or the specific display result, Common displays are provided (eg, examples shown in FIGS. 77-126).

As a result, for example, the variation pattern of variation number 9 and the variation pattern of variation number 20 execute a common effect until the display result is determined, and the variation pattern of variation number 12 and the variation pattern of variation number 23 display the result. A common effect is executed until is determined, and further, a common effect is executed until the display result is determined between the variation pattern of the variation number 15 and the variation pattern of the variation number 26. Therefore, the common effect is performed. Players can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group announcement performance is executed while they are in the group.

It should be noted that a pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the result of the lost display (for example, the variation patterns of the main variation numbers 9, 12, and 15) and that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result. is suggested (for example, the variation patterns of main variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), the display results of the variable display are different from each other until it is suggested that the display result is the lost display result or the specific display result. may be performed.

As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the group announcement effect while different effects are being executed.

(1-7) An execution period of the group effect and an advance notice effect that foretells that the display result of the variable display, which is different from the group notice, will be the specific display result (for example, the first half of the SP title notice effect). may overlap with the execution period of
The advance notice effect ends after the third display period ends,
The display in the group effect has a larger display area than the display in the advance notice effect (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 141 to 147).

Thus, even if the group notice performance is executed while the notice performance such as the SP first half title notice performance is being executed, the SP first half title notice performance can be shown to the player.

(1-8) During execution of the advance notice effect, the group effect is executed (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 141 to 147).

As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance of the group announcement effect when the announcement effect such as the SP first half title announcement effect is being executed. Note that the announcement effect such as the SP first half title announcement effect and the group announcement effect do not start to be executed at the same time.

(1-9) When the group effect is executed, the display result of the variable display has a higher probability of becoming the specific display result than when the advance notice effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. , The group notice is more reliable than the SP first half title notice).

As a result, other notice effects with a lower expectation of a big hit than the group notice effect are not displayed in the front side layer with a higher priority than the group notice effect. suggestions can be made. As described above, in the present embodiment, an effect with a high expectation for a big hit is not overlaid with a performance with a low expectation on the front side.

(1-12) During the execution of the group effect, the brightness of both the background display and the display in the advance notice effect is reduced, while the display of information related to the game (for example, the number of first reserved memories and the second reserved memory) The brightness does not decrease in the fourth symbol 5J and small symbol 5M indicating the number, the first reserved memory display area 5D, the second reserved memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5A).

As a result, when the group notice effect is executed, the background display and images related to other notice effects (for example, images related to the SP first half title notice effect, which has a lower expectation than the group notice effect) are reduced in brightness, while the game The priority is given to the display of information related to the game, which is of high importance for the player regarding the victory or defeat of the game and the degree of advantage. Can show information.

(2-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
Group effect execution means for executing a group effect (for example, group pre-announcement effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group (for example, group pre-announcement execution processing shown in FIG. 37, 6 shown in FIGS. Equipped with crowd announcement production),
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49),
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the display of a new character until the display of any character is finished first (for example, 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character ends (for example, the 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the character being displayed continues without the character being newly displayed (for example, in FIGS. 89(a37) to 90(a42). period shown),
In the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation, and secondly. A second situation in which a portion of the displayed character is displayed (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 47 and 84).

As a result, in the group announcement effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends first. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect. In addition, since there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group announcement effect, it is possible to prevent doubts about whether it is a group announcement effect or a misunderstanding that only one person will appear. can.

In the "first situation where a part of the first displayed character is displayed", as shown in FIG. While it is not displayed, a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or the gaming machine frame 3 is displayed as an image as shown in FIG. In the display area visible to the player in the state covering the screen of the device 5, while the character that was initially displayed is not fully displayed yet, the character is displayed at the end of the display area visible to the player. Including situations where part of is displayed. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which the character that first appears is completely invisible, but part of the character that first appears is visible.

"Second situation in which part of the character displayed first is displayed more than the first situation and part of the character displayed second is displayed" is shown in FIG. 47(b). Thus, on the screen of the image display device 5, the initially displayed character is not entirely displayed yet, while at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, part of the character is displayed more than in the first situation. 84(b), while the whole character displayed second is not yet displayed, but part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or FIG. 2, in the display area visible to the player when the gaming machine frame 3 covers the screen of the image display device 5, the character that was initially displayed is not entirely displayed, At the end of the display area visible to the player, a part of the character is displayed more than in the first situation, and the character displayed second is not entirely displayed yet, but is visible to the player. It includes a situation in which part of the character is displayed at the end of the display area. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which a second character appears following the first character before the first character is completely visible.

(2-2) In the group effect, the character displayed first and the character displayed second have different position coordinates on the Y-axis along the vertical direction on the screen.

As a result, since the first character and the second character do not overlap on the Y-axis, it is possible to avoid the misunderstanding that only one character appears.

(2-3) Motion blur processing is performed on the character display in the group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 45).

Since this has the effect of making each character look like a plurality of characters, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that only one person appears.

(2-4) The sound suggesting the start of the group announcement effect is output while the first character to be displayed in the group effect is being displayed, but is output before the second character to be displayed starts to be displayed. End (for example, the example shown in FIG. 84).

As a result, a sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output and the first character appears, thereby notifying the player that the group notice effect has been executed, while the second character appears. By ending the start sound before the characters appear, it is possible to suitably provide the group announcement effect.

The start sound may be output before the first character appears, or may be output at the same time as the first character appears, but is finished before the second character appears. .

(2-5) The plurality of characters to be displayed in the group effect include a character whose whole body is displayed in the display area of the screen, and a character whose whole body is not displayed in the display area of the screen. (for example, the example shown in FIG. 43).

As a result, more characters can appear in the group announcement effect in the limited display area.

(2-6) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect includes a first character (eg, maid A) and a second character (eg, maid B) different in type from the first character. ,
In each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, the first character whose entire body is displayed within the display area of the screen and a part of the whole body is displayed within the display area of the screen. The first character is displayed mixedly with the first character displayed with other parts of the whole body fit within the display area of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 43).

As a result, it is possible to create the illusion that more types of characters appear in the group announcement effect in the limited display area.

(2-7) A part of the screen is covered with a shield (for example, the game machine frame 3), and the character displayed first in the group effect is displayed at the position covered by the shield. starts, and then the display of the second displayed character starts,
Even when the screen is viewed with the shield covering it, the first situation changes to the second situation during the first display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 47).

As a result, even in the display area of the screen that the player actually sees, there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group announcement effect. It is possible to avoid the misunderstanding that it is not.

(2-8) When the game machine is viewed from the side between the screen and the shield, the edge of the screen can be viewed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 47).

As a result, even when the player visually recognizes the pachinko game machine 1 from the side and visually recognizes the edge of the screen, there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice effect, so the group notice effect is prevented. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of doubts such as whether or not there is a single person, and the misunderstanding that only one person appears.

(2-9) In the design stage, a display related to the group effect is created on a screen of a predetermined size with a mask covering the area corresponding to the position of the shield, and further, the display of the predetermined size of the screen (for example, In order to be applicable to a size larger than 19 inches (for example, 20 inches), a display regarding the group effect is created up to an area corresponding to the large size.

Thus, even when the design of the pachinko game machine 1 is suddenly changed so as to use a size larger than the predetermined size, the created group notice performance data can be applied.

(2-10) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect are low importance characters (for example, maids C to F) whose importance is low in the content of the gaming machine, and the low importance characters are more important than the low importance characters. Including highly important characters (for example, maids A and B) that are highly important in the content of the game machine,
The high-importance character is less likely than the low-importance character to be displayed with its face fit in the display area of the screen and the part of the whole body other than the face fit in the display area of the screen (for example, the 43).

As a result, a character with a high degree of importance such as the main character can be made to more easily recognize the face in the group announcement effect than a character with a low degree of importance such as a supporting character, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
Effect execution means for executing effects (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing group announcement execution processing etc. shown in FIG. 37),
The effect executed by the effect executing means includes a group effect (for example, group preview effect shown in FIGS. 84 to 90) displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49),
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the display of a new character until the display of any character is finished first (for example, 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character ends (for example, the 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the character being displayed continues without the character being newly displayed (for example, in FIGS. 89(a37) to 90(a42). period shown),
The group effect is a effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect executing means.

As a result, in the group announcement effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends first. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect. In addition, in the group announcement effect, the largest number of characters appear among all the effects, so that the player can be made to notice that the variable display with the expectation of a big win is being performed.

``The group effect is the effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects executable by the effect execution means'' is 1 among all the effects executed in the pachinko game machine This includes that the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen is the group announcement performance. In addition, ``the group effect is the effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects executable by the effect execution means'' is Among the effects that are executed during the period in which the variable display based on the 1 reserved memory is performed, such as the effect at the time of variable display of the pattern, the effect at the time of reach, the effect at the time of the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect at the time of the occurrence of the big hit, etc. This includes that the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen is the group announcement performance. In addition, ``the group effect is the effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects executable by the effect execution means'' is executed during the jackpot game state, the probability variable state after that, and the time saving state. The group announcement effect is included in the effect in which the number of characters displayed on one screen is the largest among the effects. It should be noted that, in the above-described example, the group announcement effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of types of characters to be displayed.

Further, ``the group effect is the effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects executable by the effect execution means'' is, among all the effects executed in the pachinko game machine 1, This includes that the effect with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the effect is the group announcement effect. In addition, ``the group effect is the effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects executable by the effect execution means'' is Among the effects executed during the period when the variable display based on 1 reserved memory is performed, such as the effect at the time of variable display of the pattern, the effect at the time of reach, the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect at the time of the occurrence of the big hit, etc. Including that the effect with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens in the group is the group announcement effect. In addition, ``the group effect is the effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects executable by the effect execution means'' is executed during the jackpot game state or in the probability variable state or the time saving state after that. Among the productions, the group announcement production is the production with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the production. In the above-described example, the group announcement effect may not be the effect with the largest number of types of characters to be displayed.

(3-2) A specific effect (for example, SP ready-to-win latter half or final ready-to-win effect) is executed in which the number of characters displayed is smaller than that of the group effect and a plurality of characters are displayed.

As a result, various effects can be executed, and among them, the largest number of characters can be made to appear in the group announcement effect.

Note that the specific effect may be an effect in which the number of types of characters to be displayed is greater than that of the group announcement effect.

(3-3) The number of characters displayed during the second display period of the group effect is greater than the number of characters displayed during the specific effect.

As a result, it is possible to present a powerful performance to the player in the second display period, which is the longest period of the group announcement performance.

The number of types of characters displayed in the second display period of the group announcement effect may be larger than the number of types of characters displayed in the specific effect.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
Group effect execution means for executing a group effect (for example, group pre-announcement effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group (for example, group pre-announcement execution processing shown in FIG. 37, 6 shown in FIGS. Equipped with crowd announcement production),
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49),
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the display of a new character until the display of any character is finished first (for example, 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character ends (for example, the 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the character being displayed continues without the character being newly displayed (for example, in FIGS. 89(a37) to 90(a42). period shown),
In the group performance,
An auxiliary display is displayed to indicate that the character is progressing,
When the display of the first character and the display of the second character overlap, the display of the first character is given priority over the display of the second character, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character is displayed. When the display of the second character overlaps, the display of the second character is given priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 44).

As a result, in the group announcement effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends first. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect. In addition, by providing an auxiliary display for the character, it is possible to show the player a more lively group announcement effect, but the auxiliary display does not hinder the visibility of other characters, so more characters can be displayed. It can be clearly shown to the player.

The "auxiliary display" may be any display that indicates that the character is progressing. For example, as shown in FIG. 44, an image display ( For example, it may be an image display of sand smoke), an image display showing traces that the character has passed (for example, an image display of the character's footsteps), or an image display attached to the character itself (for example, an image display of the character's footsteps). , an image display representing the character's aura). The "auxiliary display" may be an image display performed in the vicinity of the character in relation to the progress of the character.

(4-2) The layer displayed on the screen differs between the character display in the group effect and the auxiliary display in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. are placed on Layer 2 and subsequent layers).

As a result, the character image and the auxiliary display can be favorably shown to the player in the group announcement effect.

(4-3) the plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a plurality of characters of the same type (for example, character C on layers 9 and 10);
The moving image data corresponding to the group effect includes first character data (for example, moving image data of character C on layer 9) and second character data (for example, character C on layer 10) corresponding to each of a plurality of characters of the same type. video data),
The first character data and the second character data have different parameter values relating to the moving speed of the character, but have the same animation parameter value relating to the movement of the character.

As a result, even when changing the moving speed of the characters, by sharing the animation parameter values related to the actions of the characters, it is possible to reduce the number of work processes in designing the group announcement effect.

(4-4) In the group effect, a plurality of characters are not arranged at the same timing and speed at the coordinates arranged on the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 42).

As a result, since a plurality of characters do not behave in the same way at the same position, the group announcement effect can be favorably shown to the player.

(5-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
Group effect execution means for executing a group effect (for example, group pre-announcement effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group (for example, group pre-announcement execution processing shown in FIG. 37, 6 shown in FIGS. Equipped with crowd announcement production),
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49),
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the display of a new character until the display of any character is finished first (for example, 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character ends (for example, the 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the character being displayed continues without the character being newly displayed (for example, in FIGS. 89(a37) to 90(a42). period shown),
In the first display period, before the display of the character displayed first ends, the display of the newly displayed character (for example, the character displayed second) ends (for example, FIG. 85, FIG. 86).

The "newly displayed character" may be the character that appears second in the group announcement effect as shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, or the character that appears third or later in the group announcement effect. may Considering that the group notice production is a production in which a plurality of characters progress in a group, the character that appears second in the group notice production is the first displayed character as the "newly displayed character". It is preferable that the characters are positioned immediately after, and that the character that appears second passes the character that is displayed first because it gives a sense of dynamism and realism.

As a result, in the group announcement effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends first. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect. In addition, since the character appearing second overtakes the character appearing first and disappears at the top as it is, it is possible to show the player a lively group notice effect.

(5-2) the plurality of characters displayed in the group effect includes a character overtaking another character;
The number of overtaking characters is either greater than or less than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaking character.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the group forewarning effect from becoming too complicated, and to allow the player to see the group forewarning effect with a sense of dynamism. can be seen.

(5-3) When the overtaking character overtakes the other character, when the display of the overtaking character overlaps the display of the other character, the outline of the overtaking character is less than the outline of the other character. are also displayed in bold (for example, the example shown in FIG. 46).

As a result, the player can easily see how the character overtakes the other character.

(6-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. There is
Group effect execution means for executing a group effect (for example, group pre-announcement effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group (for example, group pre-announcement execution processing shown in FIG. 37, 6 shown in FIGS. Crowd announcement performance) and
Execution of a suggestive effect (for example, a PUSH effect) for displaying a suggestive image (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a character image of "PUSH!!") suggesting execution of the group effect. Means (for example, a process for executing a PUSH effect by the effect control CPU 120),
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49),
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the display of a new character until the display of any character is finished first (for example, 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character ends (for example, the 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the character being displayed continues without the character being newly displayed (for example, in FIGS. 89(a37) to 90(a42). period shown),
The display of the suggestive image ends before the first display period in the group effect starts (for example, the example shown in FIG. 83).

The "suggestive image" may be any image as long as it is an image suggesting the execution of the group notice effect, or may be an image prompting the player to operate the operating means as shown in FIG. , it may be an effect image such as light or pattern that is executed before suggesting execution of the group announcement effect, or a clock image in a timer effect that measures the time until the group announcement effect is executed. Alternatively, it may be a character image (for example, a character image of "group") suggesting execution of the group announcement effect. In addition, in the timer effect, the time until the group notice effect is executed is measured by the clock image, and when the timed time reaches a predetermined time, the character image suggesting the execution of the group notice effect (characters of "group") image) may be displayed.

As a result, in the group announcement effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends first. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect. Also, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the first appearance of the character.

(6-2) After the display of the suggestive image-related effect (for example, the effect indicating that the push button 31B has been pressed) ends, display of the character first starts in the first display period (for example, example shown in FIG. 83).

As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the first appearance of the character.

(6-3) The suggestion image includes an image prompting the player to operate the operation means (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a text image of "PUSH!!"),
The output of the sound (for example, PUSH sound) when the operation means is operated during the display of the suggestive image ends before the display of the character first starts in the first display period (for example, FIG. 83). example).

As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the first appearance of the character.

(6-4) When the operation means is operated while the suggestive image is being displayed, one of a plurality of effects including the group effect (for example, 6-person group notice, background notice, lamp notice) is executed. (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 83, 92, and 93).

As a result, a plurality of effects are executed with the player's operation as a branching point, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(7-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
Group effect executing means (for example, the group effect execution process shown in FIG. 37, FIG. 84 to FIG. 90
6-person group announcement effect shown in , dog group announcement effect shown in FIGS. 158 to 160),
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49),
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the display of a new character until the display of any character is finished first (for example, 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character ends (for example, the 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the character being displayed continues without the character being newly displayed (for example, in FIGS. 89(a37) to 90(a42). period shown),
The group effect includes a first group effect (for example, a six-person group advance notice effect) and a second group effect (for example, a dog group advance notice effect),
a plurality of characters displayed in the first group effect progress at the same or substantially the same first speed (for example, speed V1);
a plurality of characters displayed in the second group effect progress at the same or substantially the same second speed (for example, speed V2);
the first speed is faster than the second speed;
The first group effect is configured such that the linear distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character is longer than the second group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 160). .

The ``linear distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character'' is displayed first in a group announcement effect such as a six-person group announcement effect or a dog group announcement effect, as shown in FIG. It is the linear distance (X-axis distance) from the edge of the character to the edge of the last displayed character. This straight line distance is equal to time T, where T is the time from the end of the screen of the image display device 5 until the last character is displayed after the first character is displayed, and V is the speed of each character. It can be calculated by multiplying the velocity V (T×V).

As a result, in the group announcement effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends first. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect. In addition, two types of group announcement effects can be preferably shown to the players.

(7-2) The execution time of the first group effect (for example, X1/V1) is the same as or substantially the same as the execution time of the second group effect (for example, X2/V2). example shown).

As a result, two types of group announcement effects can be executed using the same or substantially the same time.

(7-3) when the second group effect is executed, the display result of the variable display has a higher probability of becoming the specific display result than when the first group effect is executed;
The execution probability of the second group effect is lower than the execution probability of the first group effect.

As a result, the speed of the character is made slower than the six-person group notice for the dog pack notice effect, which has a lower probability of execution and a higher degree of expectation than the six-person group notice. can increase the chances of

(7-4) The degree of crowding of the plurality of characters displayed in the second group effect (eg, density D2) is the degree of crowding of the plurality of characters displayed in the first group effect (eg, density degree D1).

As a result, the characters are arranged with an appropriate density in consideration of the speed and movement distance of the characters in the group announcement effect, so that a suitable group announcement effect can be provided to the player.

(7-5) In the second group effect, a plurality of characters positioned at the end of the screen are arranged from the bottom to the top of the screen,
On the screen after the plurality of characters positioned at the end have passed, a display corresponding to the subsequent performance is performed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 159).

As a result, it is possible to switch to an image for the next performance and show it to the player at the opportunity of the group notice performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(8-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
Group effect execution means for executing a group effect (for example, group pre-announcement effect) displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, group pre-announcement execution processing shown in FIG. Equipped with a group notice production),
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49),
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the display of a new character until the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character ends,
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character ends without the character being newly displayed,
During the first display period, the character starts to be displayed from a specific position so that the character progresses from the back side to the front side of the screen,
At the timing associated with the first start of display of the character at the specific position, a front-stage display (for example, display of a front-stage image with a light effect) that makes the display of the character at the specific position difficult to see is performed (for example, , example shown in FIG. 148).

The "front stage display" may be any display as long as the display of the character is difficult to see. etc.). "Impossible to visually recognize" means a state in which a player cannot completely visually recognize a specific position, a state in which a player can visually recognize a specific position but it is difficult to visually recognize the specific position, a state in which a player can visually recognize a specific position but the character cannot be seen from the specific position. It includes a state in which it is not possible to visually recognize the character's appearance, and a state in which the player can visually recognize a specific position and also visually recognize the character's appearance from the specific position, but the visual recognition is difficult.

"Timing related to the first start of character display at a specific position" means the same timing as the first start of character display at a specific position, or the first start of character display at a specific position. It includes timing within a predetermined period before and after (this predetermined period is a period in which the player has the illusion that it is the timing when the character first starts to be displayed at a specific position).

As a result, in the group announcement effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends first. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect. In addition, since the first character is displayed from a specific position that has become difficult to see due to the display of the previous image, the character can be displayed at a certain size from the beginning, and suddenly a large character is displayed. to the player.

(8-2) during the first display period, the character is enlarged and displayed so as to progress from the depth direction to the front direction on the screen;
The enlarged display of the character makes the display of the character at the specific position difficult to see (example shown in FIG. 154).

This makes it possible to give a visual effect as if a plurality of characters appeared one after another from a deep position.

(8-3) The last character to be displayed in the group effect is enlarged and displayed over at least a range extending from one end of the screen to the other end opposite to the one end (example shown in FIG. 152). .

As a result, the image display of the last character can be used to suitably switch to the effect after the group announcement effect.

(8-4) Interlocking with the action of the character displayed last in the group effect, the background display displayed in the third display period is switched to the background display corresponding to the subsequent effect (for example, FIG. 152 , an example shown in FIG. 153).

As a result, the image display of the last character can be used to suitably switch to the effect after the group announcement effect.

(8-5) The character displayed last in the group effect is enlarged and displayed over at least a range extending from one end of the screen to the other end facing the one end,
Other characters in the group effect are not displayed behind the character displayed last (for example, the example shown in FIG. 154).

As a result, even if a subsequent character image is placed at a position hidden by the first character, it cannot be seen, so there is no need to place the subsequent character image. You can give a visual effect as if it appeared.

(9-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
Group effect execution means for executing a group effect (for example, group pre-announcement effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group (for example, group pre-announcement execution processing shown in FIG. 37, 6 shown in FIGS. Crowd announcement performance) and
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49),
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the display of a new character until the display of any character is finished first (for example, 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character ends (for example, the 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the character being displayed continues without the character being newly displayed (for example, in FIGS. 89(a37) to 90(a42). period shown),
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and reduces the volume of the effect sound during the first display period thereafter. A specific volume that is higher than a predetermined volume, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to be lower than the specific volume during the third display period. The effect sound is output.

As a result, in the group announcement effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends first. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect. Also, by increasing the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at the specific volume during the second display period, it is possible to liven up the group announcement effect with the specific volume before the second display period. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The volume may be controlled to be raised or lowered by the sound output means, or the volume control of the sound output means is constant, but the increase or decrease of the volume is specified in the sound data referred to by the sound output means. The sound volume may be raised or lowered by the operation.

(9-2) The fade-in time from when the effect sound is output during the first display period until the volume of the effect sound rises to a specific volume is the same as when the volume of the effect sound begins to decrease during the third display period. is shorter than the fade-out time from when the volume of the effect sound disappears (for example, the example shown in FIG. 49).

As a result, the sound output in the group notice effect is performed in a short period of time for fade-in and a longer time for fade-out than the fade-in, so that the sound of the group notice effect can be preferably output.

(10-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
Group effect execution means for executing a group effect (for example, group pre-announcement effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group (for example, group pre-announcement execution processing shown in FIG. 37, 6 shown in FIGS. Crowd announcement performance) and
a plurality of lighting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9 such as a frame lamp),
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49),
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the display of a new character until the display of any character is finished first (for example, 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character ends (for example, the 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the character being displayed continues without the character being newly displayed (for example, in FIGS. 89(a37) to 90(a42). period shown),
A luminance data table composed of a plurality of luminance data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means is a first luminance data table (for example, a frame lamp shown in FIG. 54(a)) corresponding to the first display period. grandchild table W1), a second luminance data table corresponding to the second display period (for example, a grandchild table W2 for frame lamp shown in FIG. 54(b)), and a third luminance data table corresponding to the third display period. including a data table (for example, a frame lamp grandchild table W3 shown in FIG. 54(c)),
Each of the first luminance data table and the second luminance data table is first luminance data obtained by combining data for lighting the lighting means with low luminance and data for lighting the lighting means with high luminance. and a combination of data for lighting the lighting means at a low luminance and data for lighting the lighting means at a high luminance is composed of second luminance data different from the first luminance data (for example, FIG. Example of grandchild table for frame lamp shown in 54),
The second luminance data table is set so that more lighting means are lit with higher luminance than the first luminance data table (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is set to the frame lamp grandchild table W1). data for high intensity (“0” to “F”) is stored in more lamps than

As a result, in the group announcement effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends first. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect. Further, a luminance data table corresponding to each display period is provided, and the second luminance data table is designed to light the lamp with a higher luminance than the first luminance data table. In the second display period, weaker footsteps can be expressed when a plurality of characters appear, and strong footsteps can be expressed when a plurality of characters appear one after another in the second display period. can provide.

"Data for lighting the lighting means at low luminance" and "data for lighting the lighting means at high luminance" are data for a plurality of lighting units included in each lighting means (for example, RGB in the frame left lamp 9L1, board 54(a), the data (100) of the frame left lamp 9L1 (RGB) at T1-1. be. As RGB data, the data corresponding to turning off is "000", the data corresponding to turning on at low luminance is "100", and the data corresponding to turning on at high luminance is "F00".

"Luminance data" is lighting data for each time in each lighting means (for example, frame lamp, board lamp 9C), and is "data for lighting the lighting means at low luminance" or "data for lighting the lighting means at high luminance." For example, in the example shown in FIG. 54(a), it is the data for the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R at T1-1.

The luminance data table is a collection of "luminance data" in a predetermined period (for example, the lighting time specified in the parent table or child table). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 11 of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R.

(10-2) The first brightness data table has a longer brightness data switching interval than the second brightness data table (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 switches at intervals of 100 msec). , the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is switched at intervals of 50 to 80 msec).

This makes it possible to express that the character is running faster in the second display period than in the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

(10-3) In the first luminance data table, the luminance data switching intervals are equal, whereas in the second luminance data table, the luminance data switching intervals are not equal (eg, shown in FIG. 53). Thus, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is switched at intervals of 100 msec, and the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is switched at intervals of 50 to 80 msec).

Thus, in the second display period, it is possible to express that a plurality of characters are running at different paces than in the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

(11-1) The first luminance data table includes luminance data for moving the lighting position in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. Lights up with high brightness according to the advance direction of the notice),
The second luminance data table includes luminance data that does not move the lighting position in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. brightness).

As a result, it is possible to represent a character appearing in the first display period and a plurality of characters successively appearing in the second display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

(11-2) The first luminance data table causes the lighting means positioned near the character to be lit with high luminance in accordance with the advancing position of the character displayed first in the group effect, so that the character is displayed at high luminance. It includes luminance data for turning off or lighting at low luminance the lighting means located in the vicinity of the portion not reached (for example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 54(a)).

As a result, the lamps will light up with high brightness in line with the progress of the first character running at the beginning, and the lamps will turn off or light up with low brightness in places that have not yet reached. It is possible to express the progress of the leading character by using Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

(11-3) The first luminance data table causes the lighting means to turn on with high luminance, and then turns off or turns on the lighting means with low luminance as the character displayed first in the group effect progresses. It includes luminance data (for example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 54(a)).

As a result, the lamps will light up with high brightness as the first character running at the beginning progresses, and the lamps will turn off or light up at low brightness in places that have not yet been reached or have already passed. , and lighting of lamps can be used to represent the progress of the leading character. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

(11-4) The first luminance data table includes luminance data for lighting the lighting means with high luminance, and then lighting the lighting means positioned in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect with high luminance. (For example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 54(a)),
The second luminance data table includes luminance data that causes the lighting means to light up with high luminance and then does not light up the lighting means positioned in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect (for example, FIG. 54). An example of the frame lamp grandchild table W2 shown in (b)).

As a result, in the first display period, the lamps are illuminated with high brightness in accordance with the progress of the first displayed character running at the head, and the lamps are extinguished in places where the character has not yet reached or has already passed. Alternatively, since the lamp is lit with low luminance, it is possible to express the progress of the leading character by using the lighting of the lamp. In addition, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters progress one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

(11-5) The first luminance data table includes luminance data for lighting the lighting means with high luminance and turning off the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, the frame shown in FIG. 54(a)). Example of grandchild table W1 for lamp),
The second luminance data table includes luminance data for lighting the lighting means with high luminance and for lighting the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table W2 shown in FIG. 54B). example).

As a result, in the first display period, the lamps are illuminated with high brightness in accordance with the progress of the first displayed character running at the head, and the lamps are extinguished in places where the character has not yet reached or has already passed. Alternatively, since the lamp is lit with low luminance, it is possible to express the progress of the leading character by using the lighting of the lamp. In addition, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters progress one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

(12-1) The third luminance data table includes luminance data for increasing the number of the lighting means to be turned off in accordance with the progress of the characters in the group performance (for example, as shown in FIG. The table W3 is turned off or turned on with low luminance in accordance with the advance direction of the advance notice of the group).

As a result, in the third display period, the lamp is turned off or lit with low luminance in accordance with the progress of the character, so that the turning off or lighting of the lamp can be used to express the progress of the character. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

(12-3) In the third luminance data table, the switching interval of the luminance data in the lighting means arranged in the frame of the gaming machine positioned in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect is the same as that of the character in the group effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 53, the switching interval of the frame left lamp 9L is 10 msec.). , and the switching interval of the frame right lamp 9R is 80 msec).

As a result, in the third display period, it is possible to express how the character progresses from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and disappears. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

(13-1) In the first luminance data table, control of the lighting means starts at a timing related to the start of the first display period, control of the lighting means ends during the first display period,
According to the second luminance data table, the control of the lighting means starts during the first display period, the control of the lighting means continues during the second display period, and the lighting means continues during the third display period. the control of the means ends,
In the third luminance data table, control of the lighting means is started during the third display period (for example, an example of the group announcement luminance data table shown in FIG. 75).

As a result, from the middle of the first display period, the lamp lights up with the same high luminance as in the second display period. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

(13-2) the second luminance data table has a longer control period for the lighting means than the first luminance data table and the third luminance data table;
The control period of the lighting means is set longer in the first luminance data table than in the third luminance data table (for example, an example of the group notice luminance data table shown in FIG. 75).

Thereby, it is possible to express a state in which a plurality of characters appear one after another in the first display period with an appropriate length. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

(14-1) The first brightness data defined in the first brightness data table is brightness data for turning off or lighting at low brightness the plurality of lighting means used in the group performance (for example, the brightness data shown in FIG. 53). As shown, in the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps, the initial luminance data for all the lamps is turned off or turned on with low luminance).

As a result, the lamp lights up when the group forewarning effect is executed after a break without being mixed with the lighting of the lamp that was performed before the group forewarning effect was executed, which is more suitable. A group notice effect can be provided.

(14-2) The luminance data first defined in each of the second luminance data table and the third luminance data table is luminance data that does not turn off or turn on at low luminance the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 53, in the frame lamp grandchild tables W2 and W3, the first luminance data causes the lamp to light with high luminance).

As a result, when the characters are progressing one after another after the group announcement effect is executed, the group announcement effect can be performed by the player without delimiting by turning off all the lamps or turning on the low luminance while emphasizing the flow of the effect. can be shown to Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

(14-3) The luminance data last specified in the third luminance data table is luminance data for turning off or lighting at low luminance the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect (for example, the As shown, in the grandchild table W3 for frame lamps, the final luminance data for all the lamps is turned off or turned on with low luminance).

As a result, all the lamps are extinguished or lighted with low luminance when the group foretelling effect is to be terminated, thereby making it possible for the player to recognize that the group foretelling effect is to be terminated. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

(15-1) The first luminance data table is designed not to repeat luminance data with the same control content, while the second luminance data table is designed to repeat luminance data with the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 53, the brightness data is not defined such that the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W2. The luminance data is defined as follows).

As a result, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period set over a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

(15-2) The third luminance data table is designed not to repeat luminance data with the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. luminance data is not specified for repeated use).

As a result, the luminance data in the third display period, which is set without being longer than the second display period, is defined as it is, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

(16-1) The first luminance data table is designed not to repeat luminance data with the same control content, while the second luminance data table is designed to repeat luminance data with the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 53, the brightness data is not specified so that the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W2. The luminance data are specified as follows),
In the first luminance data table, luminance data for countermeasures against defects is defined last, while in the second luminance data table luminance data for countermeasures against defects are not defined last (for example, As shown in FIG. 53, the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps defines 10-minute data for countermeasures against troubles, and the grandchild table W2 for frame lamps does not define 10-minute data for countermeasures against troubles).

As a result, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period set over a long period of time. On the other hand, for the luminance data in the first display period, the luminance data is defined as it is, but instead, data for 10 minutes for countermeasures against problems is defined, so that countermeasures for problems are performed during the 10 minutes. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

(16-2) The luminance data for countermeasures against defects is luminance data defined for the longest period of time among the luminance data constituting the first luminance data table, and This is luminance data for preventing the lighting means from being controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 defines 10-minute data for countermeasures against defects).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting control of the lamps from being performed from the beginning of the first luminance data table by means of the 10-minute data for countermeasures against troubles, so that it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(16-3) The brightness data for countermeasures against defects is brightness data for regularly lighting the adjacent lighting means in order (for example, as shown in FIG. is luminance data for regularly lighting adjacent frame lamps in order so that the lighting position is shifted from the previous state).

As a result, even if a problem occurs, the adjacent frame lamps are regularly lit in order so that the lighting position is shifted from the previous state, so it is possible to prevent the appearance from deteriorating, which is preferable. A group notice effect can be provided.

(17-1) The lighting means includes monochromatic lighting means (for example, board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) and multicolor lighting means (for example, board lamp 9C1).
~ 9C5, 9C9 ~ 9C13) and
the luminance data for lighting the single-color lighting means at a specific high luminance includes a specific value (for example, "6") as a value corresponding to the specific high luminance lighting;
The luminance data for lighting the multi-color lighting means at the specific high luminance includes a value (for example, "8" to "F") larger than a specific value as a value corresponding to the specific high luminance lighting.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the variation in the light among the lamps that are lit with high brightness by setting the values corresponding to the high brightness lighting according to the type of the light emitting means, thereby achieving a suitable group notice effect. can be provided.

(17-2) The monochromatic lighting means includes first color lighting means (for example, board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) that light in a first color and second color lighting means (for example, board left lamps) that light in a second color. including lamps 9B1 to 9B5),
The specific value (for example, " 6”).

As a result, it is possible to adjust the variation in light even among the lamps that are lit in the same single color, and to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(18-1) Both the first brightness data table and the second brightness data table include brightness data different from each other for each of the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine (for example, FIG. 54). grandchild table for the frame lamp shown in ),
The luminance data table used in the notice effect which is different from the group effect and which foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result is stored in the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the game machine. It contains luminance data common to each (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table shown in FIG. 61).

As a result, in the group forewarning effect, lighting control is performed separately for the left frame lamp 9L and the right frame lamp 9R, so that a more detailed lighting mode can be realized, and a suitable group forewarning effect can be provided. can.

(19-1) The group effect interrupts during execution of an advance notice effect (for example, a reach line effect) that is different from the group effect and foretells that the display result of the variable display will become the specific display result. may be executed with
Even when the group effect is interrupted and executed, the lighting means continues to light according to the brightness data table corresponding to the advance notice effect (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 161 and 162),
The lighting means used in the group effect is the same as the lighting means used in the previous notice effect, or includes the lighting means used in the previous notice effect and the lighting means not used in the previous notice effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 60, in the reach line effect, there is a period during which the on-board lamp and the attacker lamp, which are always used in the group announcement effect, are not used).

As a result, even when the group notice performance is executed by interrupting other notice performances, since the common lamp is lit, the performance by lighting can be realized without discomfort, and a suitable group notice performance is provided. be able to. For example, if the group notice effect is executed by interrupting another notice effect, the lighting of the lamp in the group notice effect and the lighting of the lamp in the other notice effect will be mixed. If they are different from each other, a large number of lamps are turned on in a complicated manner, which is unattractive and may give the player a sense of incongruity. In this regard, if the lighting of the lamps in the group notice effect and the lamp lighting in the other notice effects are made common, it is possible to prevent the troublesome lighting of many lamps.

(19-2) The advance notice effect ends during execution of the group effect, and a predetermined effect (for example, symbol feed effect) different from the advance notice effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 161 and 162). example shown in ),
The lighting means used in the group effect is the same as the lighting means used in the predetermined effect, or includes the lighting means used in the predetermined effect and the lighting means not used in the predetermined effect. (For example, examples shown in FIGS. 161 and 162).

As a result, even when switching to another effect during the group forewarning effect, since the common lamp is lit, it is possible to realize the effect by lighting without discomfort, and it is possible to provide a suitable group forecast effect. .

(19-3) The group performance is executed with a predetermined execution probability of less than 100% (for example, group advance notice lottery shown in FIG. 20).

As a result, whether or not the group notice effect is to be executed is determined by a lottery regardless of other effects, so that the processing load related to the execution of the group notice effect can be reduced, and a suitable group notice effect can be provided. .

(20-1) The lighting means includes specific lighting means (for example, V lamp 9G) located at a position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group effect,
The specific lighting means can be lit when controlling to the advantageous state, and is not lit when not controlling to the advantageous state (for example, the V lamp 9G is a round of a jackpot game state in which V winning can occur). It lights up to notify that it is inside or that a V prize has occurred),
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table do not include luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, an example of the luminance data table shown in FIG. 53).

As a result, a lamp at a position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect lights up during the group notice effect, making the player misunderstand whether the control is in an advantageous state such as a big hit. You can prevent it from slipping. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

(20-2) The lighting means includes specific lighting means (for example, stick controller lamp 9J, trigger button lamp 9K) located in a position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group effect,
The specific lighting means indicates to the player that the operation of the operation means is effective by lighting (for example, the stick controller lamp 9J lights up to prompt the player to pull the stick controller 31A, and the trigger The button lamp 9K lights up to prompt the operation of pressing the push button 31B),
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table do not include luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, an example of the luminance data table shown in FIG. 53).

As a result, a lamp at a position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect lights up during the group notice effect, making the player misunderstand that the operation of the operating means is being urged. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

[Modification]
A modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described.

(Regarding the display period of the group notice effect)
Although the third display period is longer than the first display period in this embodiment, the first display period may be longer than the third display period.

As a result, by making the character appearing first in the first display period appear longer, it is possible to make it easier to draw attention to the fact that the group foretelling effect suggesting a big hit has been executed.

(Regarding the execution timing of the group notice effect)
In the present embodiment, when the result of the variable display is a change pattern that results in a false display, the group announcement effect is executed in the second half of the time of the variable display with a probability of 100%. do not have. For example, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is the result of a false display, even if the group notice effect is executed with a higher probability in the latter half of the variable display time than in the first half of the variable display time. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is the winning display result, the group announcement effect is executed in the first half of the time of the variable display with a probability of 100%. is not limited to For example, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is the winning display result, even if the group announcement effect is executed with a higher probability in the first half of the variable display time than in the second half of the variable display time. good.

(About the characters that appear in the group announcement production)
In the present embodiment, the main character Maid A (Muyume-chan) appears as the first (first) character in the first display period, but the character that appears most frequently in the second display period is the main character Maid A It may be (Mu Yume-chan).

As a result, the main character can be shown to the player frequently during the second display period, which is the longest, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, the character displayed first in the first display period may be a premier character.

As a result, the premium character can be first shown to the player in the first first display period, and the group announcement effect can be made more impactful. In addition, when the character displayed first in the first display period is a premier character, the big win may be determined. Furthermore, in this case, the lighting pattern of each lamp such as the frame lamp may be a pattern including a rainbow (seven colors).

Note that the premier character may be a character with the lowest appearance rate among all the states and effects, or may be a character that does not appear except for the group announcement effect. Also, the premier character may be a character whose appearance suggests that the expectation of a big win is higher than that of other characters.

(Regarding lighting control in the group announcement effect)
In the present embodiment, the luminance data is defined as shown in the frame lamp grandchild table shown in FIG. 54, but the luminance data may be defined as follows. That is, the first specific luminance data combining the data for lighting the lighting means with low luminance and the data for lighting the lighting means with high luminance, and the data for lighting the lighting means with low luminance. There is second specific luminance data that does not include data for lighting the lighting means at high luminance, the first specific lighting data is not used in the first luminance data table, and the second luminance data table is not used in the second luminance data table. Specific lighting data may be used.

In this way, since the data for lighting with high luminance is not specified in the first display period, it is possible to express the appearance of a plurality of characters approaching by lighting the lamp with low luminance. In the display period, since data for lighting with high brightness is defined, it is possible to express the appearance of a plurality of characters progressing one after another.

Also, the third luminance data table may include luminance data for turning off all the lighting units that were lit in the second luminance data table.

In this way, the state in which the character advances and disappears in the third display period can be expressed by turning off the lamp.

Further, the lighting means includes a specific lighting means located at a position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group effect,
A specific member capable of transmitting light is arranged on the front side of the specific lighting means,
By turning on the specific lighting means, the color visually recognized through the specific member becomes the specific color,
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table contain luminance data for lighting the lighting means in a color different from the specific color,
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table may not include luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means.

In this way, when the lamp at the position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group forewarning effect is turned on during the group forewarning effect, It is possible to prevent the visually recognized color from becoming a specific color that is not used in the group forewarning effect, thereby preventing the coloration from interfering with the group forewarning effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group announcement effect.

(About the video data of the group announcement effect)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, moving image data in which a character to be acted upon and the action contents (movement patterns) of the character are associated in advance is created at the design stage. is stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121. Then, in the pachinko game machine 1, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces the moving image data stored in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121 when it is time to execute the group announcement effect based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. was becoming However, the moving image of the group announcement effect may be reproduced by a method different from the above.

For example, the data of the character to be acted upon and the data indicating the content of the action (action pattern) may be stored in RAM 122 or ROM 121 as separate data. Then, in the pachinko game machine 1, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103, changes the character data and the motion pattern stored in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121 when it is time to execute the group announcement effect. Data to be shown may be individually selected, the two may be combined to create moving image data, and the created moving image data may be reproduced.

More specifically, in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121, a plurality of pieces of data that each of the characters A, B, and C run or walks are stored in the storage area 1. It is enough to store in the storage area 2 the moving image data showing a plurality of movement patterns related to the group announcement effect of the character of the group. Further, moving image data relating to the group foretelling effect is extracted from the storage area 2, and combined to create one moving image data for the group foretelling effect, and the created moving image data may be reproduced.

(Regarding the case where the group notice effect overlaps with another notice effect)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 146 and 159, when the execution period of the group notice effect overlaps with the execution period of another notice effect, the display area of the image in the group notice effect is changed to that of the other notice effect. Larger than the display area of the image, and the display of the image in the group notice effect has priority over the display of the image in the other notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the group notice effect is the image in the other notice effect) It was on the front side than the display layer). However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of another notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the other notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the group notice effect, and the image in the other notice effect may be given priority over the display of the image in the group notice effect (for example, the image display layer in the other notice effect is on the front side of the image display layer in the group notice effect). Alternatively, when the execution period of the group notice effect overlaps with the execution period of another notice effect, the display area of the image in the group notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the other notice effect, and the image in the other notice effect may be given priority over the display of the image in the group notice effect (for example, the image display layer in the other notice effect is on the front side of the image display layer in the group notice effect). Further, when the execution period of the group notice effect overlaps with the execution period of another notice effect, the display area of the image in the other notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the group notice effect, and the image display area in the group notice effect The display may be given priority over the display of images in other advance notice effects (for example, the layer of image display in the group notice effect is on the front side of the layer of image display in other notice effects). In addition, when the display area of the image in the other notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the group notice effect, for example, the notice image that the player pays attention to, such as an image that suggests a big win, is determined by the image in the group notice effect. An image that is hidden but positioned around the preview image (for example, an image showing flames or an aura surrounding the preview image) includes an image that is visible without being hidden by the image in the group preview effect.

(Example of time-saving control that does not go through the hit)
Next, as a time saving state, an example of executing time saving control that does not pass through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.) will be described.
(Example of time saving control using time saving pattern)

(A1) In each of the characteristic portions and modifications described above, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is a form in which the transition is made via the big hit state or small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A always operates. , the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the time saving state (high base state). That is, as a time saving state, a time saving control that does not pass through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.) may be executed.

(A2) In addition, as the above-described time-saving patterns, these time-saving patterns may be part of the losing patterns or may be part of the small winning patterns.

(A3) In addition, when performing a lottery process related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a random number dedicated to the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processes, or the lottery random number of the losing pattern The lottery may be performed using random numbers for other lotteries, such as lottery random numbers for big win patterns, lottery random numbers for small win patterns, random numbers for judging big win lotteries, and random numbers for fall lottery.

(A4) In addition, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as a small winning symbol or a losing symbol. In addition, in this case, the presence or absence of transition to the time saving state may be determined according to the small winning pattern to be used together. However, when the time-saving pattern is won, the lottery for the presence or absence of transition to the time-saving state is not performed by lottery, and the number of times of time-saving is not drawn.

(A5) In addition, when the lottery of the time saving pattern is performed and the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time saving pattern does not change according to the setting value, that is, the time saving pattern in all the setting values Although the lottery probability is the same, the lottery probability of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

(A6) In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition in the case of lottery for time-saving symbols, even when using a dedicated random number or when using another random number, the starting port (first starting Prize-winning opening, 2nd starting prize-winning opening).

(A7) In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result of the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the time-saving design lottery When using a small winning pattern random number, a specific small winning pattern random number is used as a winning value, and when using a random number for a falling lottery judgment value in a time-saving design lottery, the random number for a falling lottery judgment value can be used as a winning value. A lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the game ball passing through the time-saving area may be selected as a time-saving design.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery for the time saving pattern is performed using a structure, when the small winning pattern is used in combination with the time saving pattern, the number of variable display times of the time saving state (time saving number) depends on whether or not the time saving area is passed. keep it from changing.

(A9) In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, when using random numbers for time-saving patterns, a specific losing pattern random number is used as the winning value, and the random number of jackpot patterns is used for lottery of time-saving patterns. In that case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the setting value cannot be changed.

(A10) Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be performed at the timing after the big hit determination. In addition, the time-saving design lottery is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, without executing it in the time-saving state (high base) or high probability, regardless of which random value is used for the lottery. . However, when the time-saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of the time-saving state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each game machine.

(A11) In addition, regarding the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of times of time saving according to the winning value (symbol) and each game state. In addition, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

(A12) In addition, when the number of times of time reduction is different according to the time reduction design, it is possible to change the allocation lottery of the time reduction design with the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

(A13) Also, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

(A14) Moreover, the lottery result of "the number of times of time saving 0 times" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low-probability low base state.

(A15) In addition, a derivation lottery for the time saving end pattern (time saving end lottery) is executed, and the number of times of time saving is the number of times until the time saving end pattern is derived and displayed after the start of time saving, or until the big hit pattern is derived and displayed. good. In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

(A16) In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

(A17) In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing to be controlled to the time saving state is the point in time when the time for fixing the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small winning pattern random number is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, and when the small winning is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small winning operation.

(A18) In addition, in the case of lottery using structures, the timing to be controlled to the time-saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the game state (for example, small win state) in which the structure is operated.

(A19) In addition, in the case of a game machine that is controlled to a high-probability low-base state over a predetermined number of variable display times after a big hit (so-called specified number of times probability variable machine (ST machine)), a high probability It is a low base state, and after the high probability low base state has been executed a specified number of times of variable display and ended, the time saving state may be controlled.

(A20) In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated.

(A21) Also, the symbol confirmation time for the time saving symbol may be different from the symbol confirmation time for the other symbols.

(Other time-saving control examples using time-saving patterns)
As other time-saving control using the time-saving design, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving design is displayed in the special design in the normal state, the game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and the special design is in the time-saving state. Based on the fact that the variable display result of the time saving pattern is displayed, there is no game control to further shift from the time saving state to the same time saving state (even if the time saving pattern is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (such as the time saving state may occur again) without controlling the switching of the game state). Then, when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the normal state with the special pattern, and when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the special pattern in the time-saving state, different effects may be performed (decorative pattern Regarding, in the normal state, a special pattern is displayed as a time-saving pattern, and in the time-saving state, a general lost pattern is displayed, etc.). As a result, suitable control can be performed according to the state when the variable display result of the time saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by executing an effect according to the presence or absence of state transition).

(B2) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of the special pattern is a time saving pattern, the special pattern is a common time saving pattern in the normal state and the time saving state, and the decoration pattern is the normal state. It may be possible to display different patterns as display results in the time saving state and the time saving state (for example, the decorative pattern displays a special pattern corresponding to the time saving pattern in the normal state, but in the time saving state, it displays a simple lost pattern, etc.) For example, do not display the symbol corresponding to the symbol). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money due to the display result of the decoration pattern in the time-saving state, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect is executed to suggest whether or not the display result of the decorative pattern will be a special pattern (time saving pattern), but in the time saving state, the decorative pattern is executed. It is also possible not to execute an effect that suggests whether or not the display result of . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he/she has lost money due to the display result of the decoration pattern by the performance in the time-saving state, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decoration pattern (the time to maintain the display state after displaying the fixed surface result) is different between the normal state and the time saving state. may be controlled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money due to the performance of the decoration pattern in the time-saving state, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B5) After performing the first variable display with the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display with the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state for the player, and the normal state. Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving design is displayed in the special design, the game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, the time-saving design is variable with the special design. Based on the fact that the display result is displayed, there is no game control to move from the time saving state to the same time saving state (even if the time saving pattern is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (so that the time saving state occurs again) (a) not control the switching of the game state) may be configured. The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the result of the variable display of the time saving pattern than the first variable display, stores information on the variable display as reserved storage information, and holds the reserved storage when the time saving state ends. Depending on whether or not information is stored, different effects can be executed (when shifting to time-saving control, continuous display of time-saving control, and when not shifting to time-saving control, it is possible to specify that time-saving control is not executed. During the time-saving state, the right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification (notification to instruct right-handed hitting), and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display based on the pending storage information is stored. until all finished. Left-handed notification (notification for instructing left-handed hitting) may be omitted. As a result, suitable control can be performed according to the state when the variable display result of the time saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by executing an effect according to the presence or absence of state transition).

(B6) After performing the first variable display with the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display with the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state for the player, and the normal state. Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving design is displayed in the special design, the game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, the time-saving design is variable with the special design. Based on the fact that the display result is displayed, there is no game control to move from the time saving state to the same time saving state (even if the time saving pattern is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (so that the time saving state occurs again) (a) not control the switching of the game state) may be configured. The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the result of the variable display of the time saving pattern than the first variable display, stores information on the variable display as reserved storage information, and holds the reserved storage when the time saving state ends. Depending on whether or not information is stored, different effects can be executed (when shifting to time-saving control, continuous display of time-saving control, and when not shifting to time-saving control, it is possible to specify that time-saving control is not executed. During the time-saving state, the right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, and until the variable display based on the remaining retention storage information stored when the time-saving state ends. Left-handed notification (notification for instructing left-handed hitting) may be omitted. As a result, suitable control can be performed according to the state when the variable display result of the time saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by executing an effect according to the presence or absence of state transition).

(B7) Execute the left-handed notification in the variable display (first variable display) executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved storage information stored when the time saving state ends. may As a result, the game can be progressed smoothly, and the interest in the game can be improved because the instruction of how to beat is suitably issued.

(B8) When the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved storage information stored when the time saving state ends, and the variable display based on the remaining reserved storage information In the case of winning (small hit, big win) in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed, the notification mode of the right-handed notification executed in response to the winning It can be different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money due to the display result of the decoration pattern by the performance of the notification mode of the right-handed notification, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time saving state ends, common production when there is reserved memory information in which the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed and when there is no such reserved memory information (For example, when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed in the fourth pending memory information among the four remaining pending memories, the third pending memory Until the variable display based on the information, a common performance suggesting whether or not to return to the time saving state is executed, and a time saving state return performance different from the common performance is executed in the variable display based on the fourth reserved storage information. possible). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money due to the display result of the decoration pattern by the performance of the notification mode of the right-handed notification, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B10) Production at the time of transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends and the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information The notification mode of the right-handed notification to be executed according to the hit is different from the production at the time of the time-saving state transition based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You may do so. As a result, since the presentation changes according to the game state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(B11) Fixed display time of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends (maintain the display state after displaying the fixed surface result The fixed display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved storage information is executed may be common. Thereby, an increase in control data can be suppressed.

(B12) In the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends is executed, the right-handed notification is not executed, and the variable based on the remaining hold storage information When the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed in the display, the right hitting notification may be executed in the initial period of the start of the next variable display. As a result, the game can be progressed smoothly, and the interest in the game can be improved because the instruction of how to beat is suitably issued.

(B13) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving pattern is displayed in the special pattern in the normal state, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the variable display result is small. It is possible to execute a common specific effect (reach effect, notice effect) in the case of winning patterns (specific display results) such as winning patterns and big winning patterns and the case of reducing time patterns (special display results). Depending on which common specific effect is executed among the common specific effects provided in types, the ratio of the time saving pattern (special display result) may be different. Then, when the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed in the variable display, the right hitting notification may be executed in the initial period of the start of the next variable display. Thereby, according to the game state when the time saving pattern (special display result) is displayed, it is possible to suitably control the effect.

(B14) After the common specific effect is executed, the display result may be a winning pattern (specific display result) or a time saving pattern (special display result). As a result, the variation of the effect result of the variable display is enriched, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control creates a common variation pattern for the winning pattern (specific display result), the time saving pattern (special display result), and the losing pattern (predetermined display result). can be selected, and the effect control CPU 120 receives a command specifying the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103, depending on the type of the symbol specification command specifying the display result, Different effects in the variable display may be executable. As a result, the variety of variable display effects can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when the time saving pattern (special display result) is obtained. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved by the special effect after execution of the common specific effect.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, there may be cases where a special effect that can be executed when the time saving pattern (special display result) is executed and a case where it is not executed (for example, multiple types For example, the special effect is not executed when executing the effect with a high degree of expectation that it will be a hit among the super reach effects. As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (proportion) of the time saving pattern (special display result) when the special effect is executed may differ. As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (proportion) of the time saving pattern (special display result) when the special effect is executed may differ. As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B19) A predetermined effect different from the common specific effect (for example, an active display whose display mode can be changed depending on the degree of expectation for winning (a display that has moved from the display position of the pending display to another display position, and is currently being executed) Depending on the production mode of (display) that can suggest the expectation level of the hit corresponding to the variable display), the expectation level (ratio) that will be the time saving pattern (special display result) will be different. good too. As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B20) In the special effect that can be executed when the time saving pattern (special display result) occurs, after executing the effect (such as time saving suggesting effect) that suggests that the time saving pattern (special display result) will be performed, the winning pattern (specified It may be possible to execute an effect (such as a special jackpot with a higher game value than the time saving state) that notifies the display result). As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can be controlled in a time saving state (special state) with a different number of time saving times (time saving duration) according to the type of time saving pattern (special display result) provided in a plurality of types (for example, the 1 hour-shortening pattern: 50 hour-shortening patterns, 2nd hour-shortening pattern: 100 hour-shortening patterns, etc.), the effect control CPU 120 is given when the time-shortening pattern stops depending on the type of effect executed (for example, the type of reach effect). You may perform the production|presentation from which the number of times of time saving (duration) differs. As a result, depending on the type of performance, the player's attention can be focused on the number of subsequent time-saving times, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(B22) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving pattern is displayed in the special pattern in the normal state, the game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the progress of the game is controlled. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and an effect based on the command can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command. And, the command to be transmitted includes a special command that can be specified to shift (control) from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the production control CPU 120 sends a plurality of types of commands including the special command. When receiving, based on the pre-reading of the reserved memory information, the pre-reading notice effect for the reserved memory information that occurred after the reserved memory information specified that the variable display that can shift to the time saving state (special state) is executed Execution may be restricted (not executed at all, allowed rarely, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the effect control according to the game state when the time saving pattern (special display result) is displayed.

(B23) Based on the prefetching of the pending storage information, the prefetching of the pending storage information generated after the specified holding storage information that the variable display capable of shifting (controlling) to the jackpot game state (specific game state) is executed You may make it restrict|limit execution of an advance notice production. Then, as the pre-reading foretelling effect during execution restriction of such a foreseeing foretelling effect, a common mode effect may be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by restricting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(B24) If the variable display based on the pending memory information is the variable display in which the time saving pattern (special display result) is displayed, and if the time saving pattern (special display result) is displayed, it is not displayed as if it is a variable For both the display and the display, the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect for the reserved memory information generated after the reserved memory information may be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by restricting the execution of the performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(B25) The pre-reading notice effect during execution restriction of the pre-reading notice effect does not execute an effect with a higher expectation than a specific expectation (for example, if the color expectation of the reserved display is blue < green < red such as not changing the display color to red). As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by restricting the execution of the performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(B26) The pre-reading notice effect during execution restriction of the pre-reading notice effect does not execute a specific type of effect (for example, if the degree of expectation of the color of the reserved display is blue < green < red not change). As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by restricting the execution of the performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(Example of time-saving control using the number of variable display times that resulted in a predetermined display result such as the number of variable display times of loss)
Next, an example of time-saving control using the number of times of variable display (number of continuations of variable display with loss) that has given a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As described below, the time-saving state (special state) is that the number of continuations of variable display that has become a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times) may be made executable as a condition. As the predetermined result, the time-saving state (special state) may be executed on the condition that the number of continuations of the variable display resulting in the display failure reaches the special number of times.

(C1) After performing the first variable display by the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display by the second special symbol, the game is played based on the variable display result becoming the specific display result. It is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and in the normal state, update the numerical information of the number of executions of the variable display that has resulted in a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.), and update the numerical information. Based on, when a special condition is established that the number of times the variable display that has resulted in the predetermined display result (the number of continuations) has reached a special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.) is established, the normal state is changed to a time-saving state (special state). You may do game control to shift. The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is obtained in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is obtained in the second variable display. As a result, even in a situation where either the first variable display or the second variable display can be executed, the update of the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result is obtained is continued, so that the player can be easily relieved due to the time-saving state. , the player's desire to play can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player due to the time-saving state.

(C2) The special condition is established when it is determined, based on the numerical information, that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed continuously a special number of times (for example, 1000 times). can be As a result, when display results disadvantageous to the player continue, the player can be relieved by shifting to the time-saving state (special state), so that the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when the variable display is executed even in a state (probability variable state, time saving state) different from the normal state. As a result, the player can be favorably relieved when display results disadvantageous to the player continue.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be established by being controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rescue of the player when it becomes unnecessary to rescue the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being increased more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time saving pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition may be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rescue of the player when it becomes unnecessary to rescue the player, such as when the player becomes in a time-saving state (special state) advantageous to the player, and to prevent the gambling property from being increased more than necessary. can be done.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display is performed a special number of times. As a result, it is possible to substantially control the time-saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(C7) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the backed up stored data can be backed up when specific conditions such as an initialization operation at power-on are satisfied. Data can be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is established. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power failure is initialized at the time of initialization of the data and does not remain, so that the game arcade side is prevented from being disadvantaged.

(C8) Based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.), it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) for the period of the special number of times or more (for example, 1000 times or more), During the time-saving state (special state), it is possible to control the time-saving state (special state) again based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times, and the first time-saving state (special state); A different production may be executed in the second time saving state (special state). As a result, in a game in which the second time reduction state (special state) is in an extremely disadvantageous state, the second time reduction state shortens the variable display time more than the first time reduction state. Thus, it becomes possible to change the appearance of the presentation, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, without executing such an effect, the same effect may be executed in the first time saving state (special state) and the second time saving state (special state). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily conscious of being in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled to the second time-saving state (special state), thereby suppressing the decline in the interest in the game. be able to.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first processing regarding variable display is performed, and the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (4 or later ), the second processing relating to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is executed, and the special condition is established when the value of the special process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. The 3rd process for controlling to the time saving state based on (special state) is performed. again. A game ball can be hit separately in a first path (left game area) and a second path (right game area), and in a normal state, a game ball is hit in the first path, and in a time-saving state (special state), the second path. A game is played by hitting a game ball into the path. And, during the execution of the third process, it is not controlled to the time saving state (special state), but it is notified that it should be fired to the second path (for example, right-handed notification by right-handed lamp etc.) can be In addition, during the execution of the third process, a notification effect of shifting to a time saving state (special state) may be performed. As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control. For example, by lighting the right-handed lamp by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to execute the production of the notification of the firing direction early (before the actual time-saving fluctuation starts) when actually shifting to the time-saving state (special state). becomes.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in the variable display that satisfies the special condition, the second process may be executed after the first process is executed, and the third process may not be executed. . As a result, since controlling to an advantageous state is given priority over controlling to a time saving state (special state) based on the establishment of a special condition, the result is not more advantageous for the player, and the game interest of the player is reduced. Decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display is started, and the numerical information becomes the specific value based on the updated numerical information becoming the specific value corresponding to the special number of times. After the variable display ends (start of next fluctuation, customer waiting), control to a time saving state (special state), and when the numerical information after updating reaches a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, special information (special number of times reached flag) is changed from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set), and when controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset) may Thereby, the control which transfers to a time saving state (special state) can be suitably performed by managing special information.

(C12) The CPU 103 for game control selects and determines the variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and determines the variation pattern of the symbol fixation time that differs between when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. You may do so. As a result, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, it is possible to suitably execute the effect.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first processing regarding variable display is performed, and the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (4 or later ), the second processing relating to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is satisfied The 3rd process for controlling to the based time saving state (special state) is performed. again. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect based on the command can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that received the command. Then, when the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value when the special state, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variation pattern) according to when it is the third numerical value . As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control. For example, since different game states can be preferably identified, game control becomes easier. And if a command is changed according to the game state identified at that time, suitable effect control can be executed according to the game state by the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means).

(C14) During the time saving state (special state), when the special condition is established, the value of the special figure process flag is set to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value By doing so, it may be possible to control the time saving state (special state) again. As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control.

(C15) In the time saving state (special state), when it is controlled to the time saving state (special state) based on the display of the specific display result (hit pattern), the special condition (variable display count Condition) is established and it is controlled to the time saving state (special state), and it may be possible to execute different effects When the time is short, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is reduced after the end of the jackpot game state, etc.). As a result, it becomes possible to execute the effect of the time saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and the game interest can be improved.

(C16) In the time saving state (special state), when it is controlled to the time saving state (special state) based on the display of the specific display result (hit pattern), the special condition (variable number of times of display Condition) is established and the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and the same effect may be executed (for example, the variable display number becomes the time saving state under the condition of the special number of times or more When it hits and when it becomes a time-saving state after the end of the big hit, the time-saving state production with the same fluctuation time is used). This eliminates the need for new performance data and the like, so that development costs do not increase, and the player is not confused, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(C17) In the time saving state (special state), when it is controlled to the time saving state (special state) based on the fact that the special display result (time saving pattern) is displayed, the special condition (variable number of times of display Condition) is established and it is controlled to the time saving state (special state), and it may be possible to execute different effects When the time is reduced, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is reduced after the end of the big hit, etc.). As a result, it becomes possible to execute the effect of the time saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and the game interest can be improved.

(C18) In the time saving state (special state), when it is controlled to the time saving state (special state) based on the fact that the special display result (time saving pattern) is displayed, the special condition (the number of times of variable display Condition) is established and the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and the same effect may be executed (for example, the variable display number becomes the time saving state under the condition of the special number of times or more When the time is shortened, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the big hit ends, etc.). This eliminates the need for new performance data and the like, so that development costs do not increase, and the player is not confused, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(C19) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. A ram clear command at the time of cold start, a command for notifying the number of variable displays until the end of the time saving state at the time of hot start) can be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the predetermined information. Suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on (so-called effect that suggests that the first run in the morning is different, the background image is different, and whether it is far or near within 100 rotation fluctuations is performed) ) may be executable. By giving the player a first game motivation in the morning, the operation rate of the game machine can be increased and the processing load can be prevented from increasing.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 can transmit specific information (a command that can specify information about the time saving state) to the effect control CPU 120 in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the effect control CPU 120 Based on the specific information, it may be possible to execute a special effect related to being controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (such as the effect of suggesting the end of the time-saving state). As the specific information, first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown effect information), and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 rotations) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is performed and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). good too. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of making a player lose money without realizing it by periodically suggesting a function to the player, and to suitably implement the command processing.

(C21) The effect control CPU 120 enters a time saving state (special state) when a special condition is established based on the fact that the variable display is executed a first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times, etc.) less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for time saving state suggestive effect control) that suggests being controlled, and before the variable display of the special number of times is executed, a second predetermined number of times less than the first predetermined number of times (for example 100 times), the suggestive effect can be executed each time the variable display is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of causing a loss by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. , the backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the condition of the number of times of display), and after the backup-stored data is initialized, the specific display result (hit pattern) is displayed, and then the special Different performances (such as different performances when transitioning to the time saving state) are executed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions and when the working time saving state (special state) is controlled. As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control. In addition, since the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized due to the difference in the presentation, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the probability of a big hit can be changed, the setting can be changed. Since it is possible to comprehend that there is a possibility that the game has been played, the number of elements for guessing the setting increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(C23) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. , the backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the condition of the number of times of display), and after the backup-stored data is initialized, the specific display result (hit pattern) is displayed, and then the special Different performances are executed when being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of conditions and after being controlled to a time saving state (special state) (different performances after shifting to the time saving state, etc.). As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control. In addition, since the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized due to the difference in the presentation, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the probability of a big hit can be changed, the setting can be changed. Since it is possible to comprehend that there is a possibility that the game has been played, the number of elements for guessing the setting increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(D1) The execution ratio of the group notice effect may be changed depending on whether the result of the variable display is the result of deriving the time-saving symbol, the case of a big hit, or the case of a loss.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. Each configuration relating to the features of the pachinko game machine 1 may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine 1 described above was a payout type game machine that paid out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning. It may be a game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, Big Bonus, The present invention can also be applied to slot machines equipped with one or more of regular bonuses, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonuses).

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (“high”, “
Expressions such as "low", "different", etc.) may include that one is at a percentage of "0%". For example, it includes a ratio of "0%" for one and a ratio of "100%" or less than "100%" for the other.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

1 pachinko game machine 2 game board 3 game machine frame 5 image display device 5C, 5L, 5R decoration pattern display area 6A winning ball device 6B variable winning ball device 8L, 8R speaker 9 game effect lamp , 10 general winning opening, 11 main board, 12 effect control board, 13 voice control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay board, 20 special figure LED board, 21 gate switch, 22A first start port switch, 22B second start Mouth switch 23 Count switch 24 V winning switch 30 Ball operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 35A Controller sensor unit 35B Push sensor 41 Pass gate 50 Fourth symbol unit 81, 82, 83 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a performance execution means;
a plurality of lighting means,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a group effect displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group,
There are a first stage and a second stage with different production backgrounds,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the display of a new character until the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character ends,
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character ends without the character being newly displayed,
The production executing means is
When executing the group effect in the first stage, the group effect can be executed such that the group effect starts from a predetermined number of frames;
When executing the group effect in the second stage, the group effect can be executed such that the group effect starts from a specific number of frames different from the predetermined number of frames,
the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the group performance is performed in the first stage; the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the group performance is performed in the second stage; is different,
The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the group performance is performed in the first stage and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the group performance is performed in the second stage are A gaming machine having a higher degree of expectation for controlling to an advantageous state when a title in a specific performance notifying whether or not to control to an advantageous state is in a specific mode.

Images